Hp Compaq Dc7608 Convertible Minitower Pc Service And Maintain 390742 002
Hp-Compaq-Dc7608-Small-Form-Factor-Pc-Service-And-Maintain-141670 hp-compaq-dc7608-small-form-factor-pc-service-and-maintain-141670
Hp-Compaq-Dc7600-Ultra-Slim-Desktop-Pc-Service-And-Maintain-141661 hp-compaq-dc7600-ultra-slim-desktop-pc-service-and-maintain-141661
dc7600 Series Personal Computer Service Reference Guide (2nd Edition) c01115738
2015-01-05
: Hp Hp-Compaq-Dc7608-Convertible-Minitower-Pc-Service-And-Maintain-141667 hp-compaq-dc7608-convertible-minitower-pc-service-and-maintain-141667 hp pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 268 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
service reference guide
HP Compaq Business PC dc7600 Series
2nd Edition
This document provides information on the removal and replacement of all
parts as well as information on troubleshooting, Desktop Management, setup
utilities, PATA and SATA drives, safety, routine care, connector pin
assignments, POST error messages, and diagnostic indicator lights.
Document Part Number 390742-002
Service Reference Guide
HP Compaq Business PC dc7600 Series
2nd Edition
Document Part Number: 390742-002
February 2006
© Copyright 2005, 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, and Windows XP are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S. and other countries.
Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying
such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be
photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard
Company.
ÅWARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily
harm or loss of life.
ÄCAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to
equipment or loss of information.
Service Reference Guide
HP Compaq Business PC dc7600 Series
Second Edition (February 2006
First Edition (May 2005)
Document Part Number: 390742-002
Sercice Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 iii
Contents
1 Installing the Operating System
1.1 Installing or Upgrading Device Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 Transferring Files and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.3 Backing Up and Restoring Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.3.1 Creating a Backup File—Windows XP Professional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.3.2 Restoring from the Backup File—Windows XP Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.4 Converting to NTFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.5 HP Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
2 Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.1 Power-On Self-Test (POST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 Computer Setup Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.2.1 Using Computer Setup (F10) Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.2.2 Computer Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.2.3 Recovering the Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.3 HP Insight Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.3.1 Accessing HP Insight Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.3.2 Survey Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2.3.3 Test Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2.3.4 Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.3.5 Log Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.3.6 Saving and Printing Information in HP Insight Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.3.7 Downloading the Latest Version of HP Insight Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
3 Desktop Management
3.1 Initial Configuration and Deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.1 Altiris Deployment Solution Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.2 HP Local Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.2 Remote System Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.3 Software Updating and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.3.1 HP System Software Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.3.2 HP Client Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.3.3 HP Client Management Solutions using Altiris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.3.4 HP Local Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.3.5 Dantz Retrospect Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.3.6 Proactive Change Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.3.7 Subscriber’s Choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.3.8 Retired Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.4 ROM Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.4.1 Remote ROM Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
iv 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Contents
3.4.2 HPQFlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.4.3 Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.4.4 Replicating the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.4.5 Dual-State Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3.4.6 World Wide Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3.4.7 Building Blocks and Partners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3.5 Asset Tracking and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3.5.1 Password Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
3.5.2 Establishing a Setup Password Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
3.5.3 Establishing a Power-On Password Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3.5.4 DriveLock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
3.5.5 Smart Cover Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3.5.6 Cable Lock Provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
3.5.7 TPM Embedded Security Chip and HP ProtectTools Security Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
3.6 Fault Notification and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
3.6.1 Drive Protection System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
3.6.2 Surge-Tolerant Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
3.6.3 Thermal Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
4 Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features
4.1 SATA 1.5 and 3.0 Hard Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.2 SATA Hard Drive Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.2.1 SATA Data Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.2.2 SATA Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.3 PATA Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4 PATA Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4.1 PATA Data Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4.2 PATA Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.5 PATA Drive Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.5.1 PATA Device Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.6 ATA SMART Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.7 Drive Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.8 SATA BIOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.8.1 Legacy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.8.2 Native Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.9 Mixed Devices Boot and Drive Letter Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
5 Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.1 Chassis Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1.1 Convertible Minitower (CMT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1.2 Small Form Factor (SFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.1.3 Ultra-Slim Desktop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.2 Electrostatic Discharge Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.1 Generating Static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.2 Preventing Electrostatic Damage to Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.3 Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.2.4 Grounding the Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.2.5 Recommended Materials and Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 v
Contents
5.3 Operating Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4 Routine Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4.1 General Cleaning Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4.2 Cleaning the Computer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.4.3 Cleaning the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.4.4 Cleaning the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.4.5 Cleaning the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.5 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.5.1 Power Supply Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.5.2 Tools and Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.5.3 Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.5.4 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.5.5 Hard Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.5.6 Lithium Coin Cell Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
6 Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT)
Chassis
6.1 Preparation for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.2 Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.3 Hood Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.4 External Security Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.4.1 Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.4.2 Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.5 Computer Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.6 Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6.7 Front Drive Bezels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6.7.1 5.25” Drive Bezel Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6.7.2 Diskette Drive Bezel or Bezel Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
6.8 Cable Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
6.9 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
6.10Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–12
6.11PCI Retainer Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16
6.12Expansion Card Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–18
6.13Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–19
6.13.1Drive Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–19
6.13.2Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20
6.13.3Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22
6.13.4Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25
6.14Front I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–26
6.15Power Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–27
6.16System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–28
6.17Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29
6.17.1Type 1 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30
6.17.2Type 2 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–31
6.17.3Type 3 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32
6.18Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33
6.19Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34
6.20Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36
6.21Chassis Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37
vi 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Contents
6.22Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38
6.23Changing from Desktop to Minitower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39
6.24Changing from Minitower to Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–42
7 Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.1 Preparation for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.3 Hood Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.4 External Security Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.4.1 Security Clip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.4.2 Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.4.3 Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.4.4 Universal Chassis Clamp Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.5 Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.6 Front Drive Bezels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.7 Cable Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.8 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.9 Vertically Oriented Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.9.1 Expansion Card Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.9.2 PCI Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.9.3 PCI Express Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.10PCI Riser Card Assembly and Backwall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.11Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.11.1Drive Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.11.2Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.11.3External 3.5-inch Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.11.4Primary Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.12Fan Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
7.13Front I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
7.14Power Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
7.15Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
7.16Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
7.17Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.18Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
7.19System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
7.20Chassis Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
7.21Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
7.21.1Type 1 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
7.21.2Type 2 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
7.21.3Type 3 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
8 Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT)
Chassis
8.1 Preparation for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.2 External Security Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
8.2.1 Installing a Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
8.2.2 Installing a Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
8.3 Computer Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 vii
Contents
8.4 MultiBay Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
8.5 MultiBay Riser Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6
8.6 Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–7
8.7 Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8
8.8 Chassis Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9
8.9 Cable Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10
8.10Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–11
8.11Expansion Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–13
8.12Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–14
8.13Expansion Card Retaining Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–16
8.14Hood Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–17
8.15Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–18
8.16Front I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–20
8.17Heatsink Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21
8.18Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–22
8.19Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–24
8.20Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–25
8.20.1Type 1 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–26
8.20.2Type 2 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–27
8.20.3Type 3 Battery Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–28
8.21Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–29
8.22System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–30
A Connector Pin Assignments
B Power Cord Set Requirements
C POST Error Messages
D Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
E System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators
F Memory
Index
viii 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Contents
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 1–1
1
Installing the Operating System
ÄCAUTION: Do not add optional hardware or third-party devices to your computer until the operating
system is successfully installed. Doing so may cause errors and may prevent the operating system from
installing properly.
ÄCAUTION: Once the automatic installation has begun, DO NOT TURN OFF THE COMPUTER UNTIL
THE PROCESS IS COMPLETE. Turning off the computer during the installation process might damage the
software that runs the computer or prevent its proper installation.
The first time the computer is turned on, the operating system is automatically installed. This
takes approximately 10 minutes, depending on the system hardware configuration. At the
beginning of the installation process, you are prompted to select the appropriate language for the
operating system. Read and follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the
installation. During this process, do not turn off your computer unless you are directed to do so.
✎If the computer shipped with more than one operating system language on the hard drive, the
installation process could take up to 60 minutes.
1.1 Installing or Upgrading Device Drivers
To install hardware devices such as a printer, a display adapter, or network adapter after the
operating system installation is completed, the operating system needs access to the appropriate
software drivers for the devices.
If prompted for the I386 directory, replace the path specification with C:\i386, or use the Browse
button in the dialog box to locate the i386 folder. This action points the operating system to the
appropriate drivers.
Obtain the latest support software, including support software for the operating system from
www.hp.com. Click Driver Downloads, select Download drivers and software, enter the
model number of the computer, and press Enter.
You can also obtain the latest support software on CDs. The following Web site provides
information on how to purchase a support software CD subscription:
http://h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files/desktops/us/purchase.html
✎If the computer has an optical CD-RW drive, install the appropriate application to be able to
write to the drive. To install the application, double-click the Setup Software icon on the desktop
or the application launcher and select the Easy CD Creator and Direct CD option when
prompted.
1–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Installing the Operating System
1.2 Transferring Files and Settings
Use the Microsoft Windows XP Files and Settings Transfer Wizard to move files and settings
from an old computer to a new one. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools
> Files and Settings Transfer Wizard.
1.3 Backing Up and Restoring Files
1.3.1 Creating a Backup File—Windows XP Professional
1. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Backup.
2. Use the Backup or Restore Wizard to create a backup file or tape.
✎A backup file can be saved to a hard disk, a floppy disk, CD, USB flash media device, tape drive,
or to any other removable or nonremovable media.
1.3.2 Restoring from the Backup File—Windows XP Professional
1. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Backup.
2. Use the Backup or Restore Wizard to restore files from a backup file.
✎A backup file can be on a hard disk, a floppy disk, CD, USB flash media device, tape drive, or
any other removable or nonremovable media.
1.4 Converting to NTFS
Windows XP Professional
To convert a FAT or FAT32 volume to NTFS,
1. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
2. Type convert drive_letter: /fs:ntfs (where drive_letter is the volume to be converted) and
press Enter.
1.5 HP Software
The Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system is preinstalled on the computer and
will be configured automatically the first time the computer is turned on. The following HP
software may also be installed at that time on selected models:
■Computer Setup Utilities
■HP Support Software including device drivers
■Online Safety & Comfort Guide
■Power Management with energy saver features
■Security Management tools
■Software Support Management tools
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 1–3
Installing the Operating System
Certain drivers and utilities are available only in selected languages. You can obtain the latest
version of these files, in English and selected other languages, in one of three ways:
■Support Software CD
■HP Web site at www.hp.com
■Restore Plus! CD, which is supplied with many HP models
✎Additional HP software may be required in certain situations.
1–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Installing the Operating System
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 2–1
2
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Setup Utilities (F10) and diagnostic features provide information needed about the computer
system when contacting Customer Support. These tools can also be used to:
■Change factory default settings and to set or change the system configuration, which may be
necessary when you add or remove hardware.
■Determine if all of the devices installed on the computer are recognized by the system and
functioning properly.
■Determine information about the operating environment of the computer.
■Solve system configuration errors detected but not automatically fixed during the Power-On
Self-Test (POST).
■Establish and manage passwords and other security features.
■Establish and manage energy-saving timeouts.
✎All features identified in this chapter may not be available on all HP products.
2.1 Power-On Self-Test (POST)
POST is a series of diagnostic tests that runs automatically when the system is turned on. POST
checks the following items to ensure that the computer system is functioning properly:
■Keyboard
■Memory modules
■All mass storage devices
■Processors
■Controllers
✎If the Power-On Password is set, a key icon appears on the screen while POST is running. You
will need to enter the password before continuing. Refer to Section 3.1, “Initial Configuration
and Deployment” for information on setting, deleting, or bypassing the password.
If POST finds an error in the system, an audible and/or visual message occurs. For POST error
messages and their solutions refer to Appendix C, “POST Error Messages.”
2–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.2 Computer Setup Utilities
Use Computer Setup Utilities (F10) to:
■Change factory default settings.
■Set the system date and time.
■Set, view, change, or verify the system configuration, including settings for processor,
graphics, memory, audio, storage, communications, and input devices.
■Modify the boot order of bootable devices such as hard drives, diskette drives, optical drives,
or USB flash media devices.
■Enable Quick Boot, which is faster than Full Boot but does not run all of the diagnostic tests
run during a Full Boot. You can set the system to:
❏always Quick Boot (default);
❏periodically Full Boot (from every 1 to 30 days); or
❏always Full Boot.
■Select Post Messages Enabled or Disabled to change the display status of Power-On
Self-Test (POST) messages. Post Messages Disabled suppresses most POST messages, such
as memory count, product name, and other non-error text messages. If a POST error occurs,
the error is displayed regardless of the mode selected. To manually switch to Post Messages
Enabled during POST, press any key (except F1 through F12).
■Establish an Ownership Tag, the text of which is displayed each time the system is turned on
or restarted.
■Enter the Asset Tag or property identification number assigned by the company to this
computer.
■Enable the power-on password prompt during system restarts (warm boots) as well as during
power-on.
■Establish a setup password that controls access to Computer Setup (F10) Utility and the
settings described in this section.
■Secure integrated I/O functionality, including the serial, USB, or parallel ports, audio, or
embedded NIC, so that they cannot be used until they are unsecured.
■Enable or disable removable media boot ability.
■Enable or disable legacy diskette write ability (when supported by hardware).
■Solve system configuration errors detected but not automatically fixed during the Power-On
Self-Test (POST).
■Replicate the system setup by saving system configuration information on diskette and
restoring it on one or more computers.
■Execute self-tests on a specified ATA hard drive (when supported by drive).
■Enable or disable DriveLock security (when supported by drive).
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 2–3
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.2.1 Using Computer Setup (F10) Utilities
Computer Setup can be accessed only by turning on the computer or restarting the system. To
access the Computer Setup Utilities menu, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start >Shut Down >Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
✎If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and press
and hold the F10 key again to access the utility.
If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you may see a Keyboard Error message—disregard it.
3. Select your language from the list and press the Enter key.
4. A choice of five headings appears in the Computer Setup Utilities menu: File, Storage,
Security, Power, and Advanced.
5. Use the arrow (left and right) keys to select the appropriate heading. Use the arrow (up and
down) keys to select the option you want, then press Enter. To return to the Computer Setup
Utilities menu, press Esc.
6. To apply and save changes, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
❏If you have made changes that you do not want applied, select Ignore Changes and
Exit.
❏To reset to factory settings or previously saved default settings, select Set Defaults and
Exit. This option will restore the original factory system defaults.
ÄCAUTION: Do NOT turn the computer power OFF while the ROM is saving your F10 Computer Setup
changes because the CMOS could become corrupted. It is safe to turn off all power to the computer after
you exit the F10 Setup screen.
2–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.2.2 Computer Setup Menu
Heading Option Description
File System Information Lists:
•Product name
• SKU number (some models)
• Processor type/speed/stepping
• Cache size (L1/L2) (dual core processors have this listed twice)
• Total installed memory size, speed, and operating mode (Single
Channel, Dual Channel, or Asymmetric) (if applicable)
• Installed memory in each DIMM slot, grouped by channels (if
applicable)
• Integrated MAC address for embedded, enabled NIC (if
applicable)
• System BIOS (includes family name and version)
• Chassis serial number
• Asset tracking number
About Displays copyright information.
Set Time and Date Allows you to set system time and date.
Flash System ROM Allows you to select a drive containing a new BIOS.
Replicated Setup Save to Removable Media
Saves system configuration, including CMOS, to a formatted
1.44-MB diskette, a USB flash media device, or a diskette-like
device (a storage device set to emulate a diskette drive).
Restore from Removable Media
Restores system configuration from a diskette, a USB flash media
device, or a diskette-like device.
Default Setup Save Current Settings as Default
Saves the current system configuration settings as the default.
Restore Factory Settings as Default
Restores the factory system configuration settings as the default.
Apply Defaults
and Exit
Applies the currently selected default settings and clears any
established passwords.
Ignore Changes
and Exit
Exits Computer Setup without applying or saving any changes.
Save Changes and
Exit
Saves changes to system configuration or default settings and exits
Computer Setup.
✎Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 2–5
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Storage Device
Configuration
Lists all installed BIOS-controlled storage devices.
When a device is selected, detailed information and options are
displayed. The following options may be presented.
Diskette Type
Identifies the highest capacity media type accepted by the diskette
drive.
Legacy Diskette Drives
Options are 3.5" 1.44 MB, and 5.25" 1.2 MB.
Drive Emulation
Allows you to select a drive emulation type for a certain storage
device. (For example, a Zip drive can be made bootable by
selecting diskette emulation.)
Drive Type Emulation Options
ATAPI Zip drive None (treated as Other)
Diskette (treated as diskette drive)
ATA Hard disk None (treated as Other)
Hard disk (treated as hard drive)
Legacy diskette No emulation options available
CD-ROM drive No emulation options available
ATAPI LS-120 None (treated as Other).
Diskette (treated as diskette drive).
Heading Option Description
✎Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
2–6 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Storage
(continued)
Device
Configuration
(continued)
Default Values IDE/SATA
If selected, this option allows you to specify the default values for the
Multisector Transfers, Transfer Mode, and Translation Mode for ATA
devices.
Multisector Transfers (ATA disks only)
Specifies how many sectors are transferred per multi-sector
PIO operation. Options (subject to device capabilities) are
Disabled, 8, and 16.
Transfer Mode (IDE devices only)
Specifies the active data transfer mode. Options (subject to
device capabilities) are PIO 0, Max PIO, Enhanced DMA,
Ultra DMA 0, and Max UDMA.
Translation Mode (ATA disks only)
Lets you select the translation mode to be used for the device.
This enables the BIOS to access disks partitioned and
formatted on other systems and may be necessary for users of
older versions of UNIX (e.g., SCO UNIX version 3.2).
Options are Automatic, Bit-Shift, LBA Assisted, User, and
None
ÄCAUTION: Ordinarily, the translation mode selected
automatically by the BIOS should not be changed. If the
selected translation mode is not compatible with the
translation mode that was active when the disk was
partitioned and formatted, the data on the disk will be
inaccessible.
Translation Parameters (ATA disks only)
✎This feature appears only when User translation mode is
selected.
Allows you to specify the parameters (logical cylinders,
heads, and sectors per track) used by the BIOS to translate
disk I/O requests (from the operating system or an
application) into terms the hard drive can accept. Logical
cylinders may not exceed 1024. The number of heads may
not exceed 256. The number of sectors per track may not
exceed 63. These fields are only visible and changeable
when the drive translation mode is set to User.
Storage Options Removable Media Boot
Enables/disables ability to boot the system from removable media.
Legacy Diskette Write
Enables/disables ability to write data to legacy diskettes.
✎After saving changes to Removable Media Write, the computer
will restart. Turn the computer off, then on, manually.
Heading Option Description
✎Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 2–7
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Storage
(continued)
Storage Options
(continued)
BIOS DMA Data Transfers
Allows you to control how BIOS device I/O requests are serviced.
When “Enable” is selected, the BIOS will service ATA device read
and write requests with DMA data transfers. When “Disable” is
selected, the BIOS will service ATA device read and write requests
with PIO data transfers.
SATA Emulation
Allows you to choose how the SATA controller and devices are
accessed by the operating system.
“Separate IDE Controller” is the default option. Up to 4 SATA and 2
PATA devices may be accessed in this mode. The SATA and PATA
controllers appear as two separate IDE controllers. Use this option
with Microsoft Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
• SATA 0 is seen as SATA Primary Device 0
• SATA 1 (if present) is seen as SATA Secondary Device 0
• SATA 2 (if present) is seen as SATA Primary Device 1.
• SATA 3 (if present) is seen as SATA Secondary Device 1.
“Combined IDE Controller” is the other option. Up to 2 PATA and 2
SATA devices may be accessed in this mode. The SATA and PATA
controllers appear as one combined IDE controller. Use this option
with Microsoft Windows 98 and earlier operating systems.
• PATA Primary Device 0 replaces SATA 1
• PATA Primary Device 1 replaces SATA 3
IDE Controller
Allows you to enable or disable the primary IDE controller. This
feature is supported on some models only.
Primary SATA Controller
Allows you to enable or disable the Primary SATA controller.
Secondary SATA Controller
Allows you to enable or disable the Secondary SATA controller. This
feature is supported on some models only.
DPS Self-Test Allows you to execute self-tests on ATA hard drives capable of
performing the Drive Protection System (DPS) self-tests.
✎This selection will only appear when at least one drive capable of
performing the DPS self-tests is attached to the system.
Heading Option Description
✎Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
2–8 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Storage
(continued)
Boot Order Allows you to:
• Specify the order in which attached devices (such as a USB
flash media device, diskette drive, hard drive, optical drive, or
network interface card) are checked for a bootable operating
system image. Each device on the list may be individually
excluded from or included for consideration as a bootable
operating system source.
• Specify the order of attached hard drives. The first hard drive in
the order will have priority in the boot sequence and will be
recognized as drive C (if any devices are attached).
✎MS-DOS drive lettering assignments may not apply after a
non-MS-DOS operating system has started.
Shortcut to Temporarily Override Boot Order
To boot one time from a device other than the default device
specified in Boot Order, restart the computer and press F9 when the
monitor light turns green. After POST is completed, a list of bootable
devices is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select the preferred
bootable device and press Enter. The computer then boots from the
selected non-default device for this one time.
Security Smart Card
Options
Allows you to enable/disable the Smart Card to be used in place of
the Power-On Password. This option only appears if a Smart Card
reader is attached to the system.
Setup Password Allows you to set and enables setup (administrator) password.
✎If the setup password is set, it is required to change Computer
Setup options, flash the ROM, and make changes to certain plug
and play settings under Windows.
Power-On
Password
Allows you to set and enable power-on password.
Password Options
(This selection will
appear only if a
power-on
password is set.)
Allows you to:
• Lock legacy resources (appears if a setup password is set)
• Enable/disable network server mode (appears if a power-on
password is set)
• Specify whether the password is required for warm boot
(CTRL+ALT+DEL). (appears if a power-on password is set)
Smart Cover Allows you to:
• Lock/unlock the Cover Lock.
• Set the Cover Removal Sensor to Disable/Notify User/Setup
Password.
✎Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that the
cover has been removed. Setup Password requires that the setup
password be entered to boot the computer if the sensor detects
that the cover has been removed.
This feature is supported on some models only.
Heading Option Description
✎Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 2–9
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Security
(continued)
Embedded
Security
Allows you to:
• Enable/disable the Embedded Security device.
• Reset the device to Factory Settings.
• Enable/disable power-on authentication support.
• Reset authentication credentials.
This feature is supported on some models only.
Device Security Enables/disables serial ports, parallel port, front USB ports, system
audio, internal speaker (does not affect external speakers) network
controllers (some models), MultiBay devices (some models), SMBus
controller (some models), SCSI controllers (some models), and
embedded security device.
Network Service
Boot
Enables/disables the computer’s ability to boot from an operating
system installed on a network server. (Feature available on NIC
models only; the network controller must reside on the PCI bus or be
embedded on the system board.)
System IDs Allows you to set:
• Asset tag (18-byte identifier) and ownership Tag (80-byte
identifier displayed during POST).
• Chassis serial number or Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)
number. The UUID can only be updated if the current chassis
serial number is invalid. (These ID numbers are normally set in
the factory and are used to uniquely identify the system.)
• Keyboard locale setting (for example, English or German) for
System ID entry.
DriveLock Security Allows you to assign or modify a master or user password for drives
that support ATA Security. When this feature is enabled, the user is
prompted to provide one of the DriveLock passwords during POST.
If neither is successfully entered, the hard drive will remain
inaccessible until one of the passwords is successfully provided
during a subsequent cold-boot sequence.
✎This selection will only appear when at least one drive that
supports ATA Security is attached to the system.
OS Security • Data Execution Prevention (some models) (enable/disable).
Helps prevent OS security breaches.
✎This selection is in effect only if the processor and operating
system being used comprehend and utilize this feature.
• Intel Virtualization Technology (some models) (enable/disable).
Changing this setting requires turning the computer off and then
back on.
✎This selection is in effect only if the processor and operating
system being used comprehend and utilize this feature.
Heading Option Description
✎Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
2–10 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Security
(continued)
Data Execution
Prevention
Enable/Disable.
Data Execution Prevention Mode help prevent OS security breaches.
✎This selection is in effect only if the processor and operating
system being used comprehend and utilize the function.
Power OS Power
Management
• Runtime Power Management - Enable/Disable. Allows certain
operating systems to reduce processor voltage and frequency
when the current software load does not require the full
capabilities of the processor. This option is only available when
supported by the processor.
• Idle Power Savings - Extended/Normal. Allows certain
operating systems to decrease the processors power
consumption when the processor is idle. This option is only
available when supported by the processor.
• ACPI S3 Support - Enables or disables ACPI S3 support.
• ACPI S3 Hard Disk Reset - Enabling this causes the BIOS to
ensure hard disks are ready to accept commands after
resuming from S3 before returning control to the operating
system.
• ACPI S3 PS2 Mouse Wakeup - Enables or disables waking from
S3 due to PS2 mouse activity.
• USB Wake on Device Insertion - Allows system to wake from
Standby on USB device insertion.
Hardware Power
Management
SATA power management enables or disables SATA bus and/or
device power management.
Thermal Fan idle mode - This bar graph controls the minimum permitted fan
speed.
✎This setting only changes the minimum fan speed. The fans are
still automatically controlled.
Heading Option Description
✎Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 2–11
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Advanced*
*For
advanced
users only
Power-On Options Allows you to set:
• POST mode (QuickBoot, FullBoot, or FullBoot every 1-30 days).
• POST messages (enable/disable).
•F9 prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will display
the text F9=Boot Menu during POST. Disabling this feature
prevents the text from being displayed but pressing F9 will still
access the Shortcut Boot (Order) Menu screen. See Storage >
Boot Order for more information.
•F10 prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will display
the text F10=Setup during POST. Disabling this feature
prevents the text from being displayed but pressing F10 will still
access the Setup screen.
•F12 prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will display
the text F12=Network Service Boot during POST.
Disabling this feature prevents the text from being displayed but
pressing F12 will still force the system to attempt booting from
the network.
• Option ROM* prompt (enable/disable). Enabling this feature
will cause the system to display a message before loading
options ROMs. (This feature is supported on some models only.)
• Remote wakeup boot source (remote server/local hard drive).
• After Power Loss (off/on/previous state): Set this option to ON:
•Off - causes the computer to remain powered off when power
is restored.
•On - causes the computer to power on automatically as soon
as power is restored.
•On - allows you to power on the computer using a power strip
switch, if the computer is connected to an electric power strip.
•Previous state - causes the computer to power on automatically
as soon as power is restored, if it was on when power was
lost.
✎If you turn off power to your computer using the switch on a
power strip, you will not be able to use the suspend/sleep feature
or the Remote Management features.
• POST Delay (in seconds) (enable/disable). Enabling this feature
will add a user-specified delay to the POST process. This delay
is sometimes needed for hard disks on some PCI cards that spin
up very slowly; so slowly that they are not ready to boot by the
time POST is finished. The POST delay also gives you more time
to press F10 to enter Computer (F10) Setup.
• I/O APIC Mode (enable/disable). Enabling this feature will
allow Microsoft Windows Operating Systems to run optimally.
This feature must be disabled for certain non-Microsoft
Operating Systems to work properly.
Heading Option Description
✎Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
2–12 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Advanced*
(continued)
*For
advanced
users only
Power-On Options
(continued)
Allows you to set: (continued)
• Hyper-threading (enable/disable)
• Set Up Browse Mode (enable/disable). Enabling this feature
permits Computer Setup to be viewed, but not changed, without
entering the setup password.
• Limit CPUID Maximum Value to 3 - Restricts the number of
CPUID functions reported by the microprocessor. Enable this
feature if booting to WinNT.
• ACPI/USB Buffers @ Top of Memory (enable/disable).
Enabling this feature places USB memory buffers at the top
of memory. The advantage is that some amount of memory
below 1 MB is freed up for use by option ROMs. The
disadvantage is that a popular memory manager, HIMEM.SYS,
does not work properly when USB buffers are at top of memory
AND the system has 64 MB or less of RAM.
Execute Memory
Test
Restarts the computer and executes the POST memory test.
BIOS Power-On Allows you to set the computer to turn on automatically at a time you
specify.
Onboard Devices Allows you to set resources for or disable onboard system devices
(diskette controller, serial port, or parallel port).
PCI Devices • Lists currently installed PCI devices and their IRQ settings.
• Allows you to reconfigure IRQ settings for these devices or to
disable them entirely. These settings have no effect under an
APIC-based operating system.
PCI VGA
Configuration
Displayed only if there are multiple PCI video adapters in the
system. Allows you to specify which VGA controller will be the
“boot” or primary VGA controller.
Bus Options* On some models, allows you to enable or disable:
• PCI SERR# Generation.
• PCI VGA palette snooping, which sets the VGA palette
snooping bit in PCI configuration space; only needed when
more than one graphics controller is installed.
Heading Option Description
✎Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 2–13
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
Advanced*
(continued)
*For
advanced
users only
Device options Allows you to set:
• Printer mode (bi-directional, EPP & ECP, output only).
•Num Lock state at power-on (off/on).
• S5 Wake on LAN (enable/disable).
• To disable Wake on LAN during the off state (S5), use the arrow
(left and right) keys to select the Advanced > Device Options
menu and set the S5 Wake on Lan feature to “Disable.” This
obtains the lowest power consumption available on the computer
during S5. It does not affect the ability of the computer to Wake on
LAN from suspend or hibernation, but will prevent it from waking
from S5 via the network. It does not affect operation of the network
connection while the computer is on.
• If a network connection is not required, completely disable the
network controller (NIC) by using the arrow (left and right) keys to
select the Security > Device Security menu. Set the Network
Controller option to “Device Hidden.” This prevents the network
controller from being used by the operating system and reduces the
power used by the computer in S5.
• Processor cache (enable/disable).
• Unique Sleep State Blink Patterns. Allows you to choose an LED
blink pattern that uniquely identifies each sleep state.
•1 blink followed by 2-sec. pause = S1
•2 blinks followed by 2-sec. pause = S2
•3 blinks followed by 2-sec. pause = S3
• Integrated Video (enable/disable) Allows you to use integrated
video and PCI Up Solution video at the same time (available on
some models only).
✎Inserting a PCI or PCI Express video card automatically disables
Integrated Video. When PCI Express video is on, Integrated
Video must remain disabled.
• Monitor Tracking (enable/disable). Allows ROM to save
monitor asset information.
• NIC PXE Option ROM Download (enable/disable). The BIOS
contains an embedded NIC option ROM to allow the unit to
boot through the network to a PXE server. This is typically used
to download a corporate image to a hard drive. The NIC
option ROM takes up memory space below 1MB commonly
referred to as DOS Compatibility Hole (DCH) space. This space
is limited. This F10 option will allow users to disable the
downloading of this embedded NIC option ROM thus giving
more DCH space for additional PCI cards which may need
option ROM space. The default will be to have the NIC option
ROM enabled.
PCI VGA
Configuration
Displayed only if there are multiple PCI video adapters in the
system. Allows you to specify which VGA controller will be the
“boot” or primary VGA controller.
Heading Option Description
✎Support for specific Computer Setup options may vary depending on the hardware configuration.
2–14 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.2.3 Recovering the Configuration Settings
This method of recovery requires that you first perform the Save to Removable Media command
with the Computer Setup (F10) Utility before Restore is needed.
✎It is recommended that you save any modified computer configuration settings to a diskette, a
USB flash media device, or a diskette-like device (a storage device set to emulate a diskette
drive) and save the diskette or device for possible future use.
To restore the configuration, insert the diskette, USB flash media device, or other storage media
emulating a diskette with the saved configuration and perform the Restore from Removable
Media command with the Computer Setup (F10) Utility.
2.3 HP Insight Diagnostics
✎HP Insight Diagnostics is included on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD with some
computer models only.
The HP Insight Diagnostics utility allows you to view information about the hardware
configuration of the computer and perform hardware diagnostic tests on the subsystems of the
computer. The utility simplifies the process of effectively identifying, diagnosing, and isolating
hardware issues.
The Survey tab is displayed when you invoke HP Insight Diagnostics. This tab shows the current
configuration of the computer. From the Survey tab, there is access to several categories of
information about the computer. Other tabs provide additional information, including diagnostic
test options and test results. The information in each screen of the utility can be saved as an html
file and stored on a diskette or USB HP Drive Key.
Use HP Insight Diagnostics to determine if all the devices installed on the computer are
recognized by the system and functioning properly. Running tests is optional but recommended
after installing or connecting a new device.
You should run tests, save the test results, and print them so that you have printed reports
available before placing a call to the Customer Support Center.
✎Third party devices may not be detected by HP Insight Diagnostics.
2.3.1 Accessing HP Insight Diagnostics
You must boot to the Documentation and Diagnostics CD, as described in the steps below, to
access HP Insight Diagnostics.
1. While the computer is on, insert the Documentation and Diagnostics CD into an optical drive
on the computer.
2. Shut down the operating system and turn off the computer.
3. Turn on the computer. The system will boot to the CD.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 2–15
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
✎If the system does not boot to the CD in the optical drive, you may need to change the boot order
in the Computer Setup (F10) utility so that the system attempts to boot to the optical drive before
booting to the hard drive. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation
and Diagnostics CD for more information.
4. When prompted, press the Y key if you want to operate in Safe mode or any other key if you
want to operate in Regular mode.
✎Regular mode is the default mode if no keys are pressed within the specified time frame. If the
screen remains blank after pressing any key other than Y, try rebooting and select safe mode
when prompted.
5. Select the appropriate language and click Continue.
✎It is recommended that you accept the assigned default keyboard for your language unless you
want to test your specific keyboard.
6. In the End User License Agreement page, click Agree if you agree with the terms. The HP
Insight Diagnostics utility launches with the Survey tab displayed.
2.3.2 Survey Tab
The Survey tab displays important system configuration information. In the View section on the
left side of the screen, you can select the Summary view to see limited configuration data or
select the Advanced view to see all the data in the selected category. Regardless of whether you
choose Advanced or Summary, the following categories of information are available on the
Survey tab:
All—Gives a listing of all categories of information about the computer.
Overview—Gives you a listing of general information about the computer.
Architecture—Provides system BIOS and PCI device information.
Asset Control—Shows asset tag, system serial number, and processor information.
Communication—Shows information about the computer parallel (LPT) and serial (COM) port
settings, plus USB and network controller information.
Graphics—Shows information about the graphics controller of the computer.
Input Devices—Shows information about the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices
connected to the computer.
Memory—Shows information about all memory in the computer. This includes memory slots on
the system board and any memory modules installed.
Miscellaneous—Shows information obtained from the computer configuration memory
(CMOS), system management BIOS data, system board data, and diagnostics component
information.
Storage—Shows information about storage media connected to the computer. This list includes
all fixed disks, diskette drives, and optical drives.
System—Shows information about the system board, processor, chassis, and BIOS, plus internal
speaker and PCI bus information.
2–16 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.3.3 Test Tab
The Test tab allows you to choose various parts of the system to test. You can also choose the
type of test and testing mode.
There are two test modes to choose from:
■Interactive Mode—Provides maximum control over the testing process. The diagnostic
software will prompt you for input during tests that require your interaction.You may also
determine whether the test passed or failed.
■Unattended Mode—Does not display prompts and requires no interaction. If errors are
found, they are displayed when testing is complete.
There are three types of tests to choose from:
■Quick Test—Provides a predetermined script where a sample of each hardware component
is exercised and requires no user intervention in either Unattended or Interactive mode.
■Complete Test—Provides a predetermined script where each hardware component is fully
tested. There are more tests available in the Interactive mode, but these require user
intervention.
■Custom Test—Provides the most flexibility in controlling the testing of a system. The
Custom Test mode allows you to specifically select which devices, tests, and test parameters
are run.
To begin testing:
1. Select the Test tab.
2. On the left side of the tab, select the Type of Test to perform (Quick, Complete, or
Custom).
3. On the left side of the tab, select the Test Mode (Interactive or Unattended).
4. Select the device to be tested from the drop-down list.
5. Choose how you want the test to be executed, either Number of Loops or Total Test Time.
When choosing to run the test over a specified number of loops, enter the number of loops to
perform. If you desire to have the diagnostic test for a specified time period, enter the amount
of time in minutes.
6. Click Begin Testing to start the test. The Status tab, which allows you to monitor the
progress of the test, is automatically displayed during the testing process. When the test is
complete, the Status tab shows whether the device passed or failed.
7. If errors are found, go to the Log tab and click the Error Log to display more detailed
information and recommended actions.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 2–17
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
2.3.4 Status Tab
The Status tab displays the status of the selected tests. The type of test executed (Quick,
Complete, or Custom) is also displayed. The main progress bar displays the percent complete of
the current set of tests. While testing is in progress, a Cancel Testing button is displayed for use
if you want to cancel the test.
After testing has completed, the Cancel Testing button is replaced with a Retest button. The
Retest button will retest the last set of tests executed. This enables you to re-run the set of tests
without having to re-enter the data in the Test tab.
The Status tab also shows:
■The devices being tested
■The tests that are running
■The overall elapsed time
■The individual elapsed test times
■The condition status of each test
2.3.5 Log Tab
The Log tab contains two logs, a Test Log and an Error Log, each of which can be selected from
the left side of the tab.
The Test Log displays all tests that have been executed, the number of times of execution, the
number of times the test failed, and the time it took to complete the test. The Clear Test Log
button will clear the contents of the Test Log.
The Error Log displays the tests for devices that have failed during the diagnostic testing and
includes the following columns of information.
■The Description section describes the error that the diagnostic test found.
■The Recommended Repair will give a recommended action that should be performed to
resolve the failed hardware.
■The Failed Count is the number of times the test has failed.
■The Error Code provides a numerical code for the failure. The error codes are defined in the
Help tab.
■The Clear Error Log button will clear the contents of the Error Log.
2.3.6 Saving and Printing Information in HP Insight Diagnostics
You can save the information displayed in the HP Insight Diagnostics Status and Log tabs to a
diskette or a USB 2.0 HP Drive Key (64MB or higher). You can not save to the hard drive. The
system will automatically create an html file that has the same appearance as the information
displayed on the screen.
1. Insert a diskette or USB 2.0 HP Drive Key (capacity must be 64MB or higher). USB 1.0
Drive Keys are not supported.
2. Click Save in the upper right corner of the tab.
3. Select Save to the floppy or Save to USB key.
4. Enter a file name in the File Name box and click the Save button. An html file will be saved
to the inserted diskette or USB HP Drive Key.
2–18 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Setup Utilities and Diagnostics Features
5. Print the information from the storage device used to save it.
✎To exit HP Insight Diagnostics, click Exit in the upper right corner of the screen then remove the
Documentation and Diagnostics CD from the optical drive.
2.3.7 Downloading the Latest Version of HP Insight Diagnostics
1. Go to www.hp.com.
2. Click the Driver Downloads or Support & Troubleshooting link.
3. Click the Download driver and software radio button.
4. Enter your product number (for example, dc7600) in the text box and press the Enter key.
5. Select your product.
6. Select your OS.
7. Click the Diagnostics link.
8. Select HP Insight Diagnostics and click Download.
✎The download includes instructions on how to create the bootable CD.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 3–1
3
Desktop Management
HP Client Management Solutions provides standards-based solutions for managing and
controlling desktops, workstations, and notebook PCs in a networked environment.
The key capabilities and features of desktop management are:
■Initial configuration and deployment
■Remote system installation
■Software updating and management
■ROM flash
■Asset tracking and security
■Fault notification and recovery
✎Support for specific features described in this guide may vary by model or software version.
3.1 Initial Configuration and Deployment
HP computers come with a preinstalled system software image. After a brief software
“unbundling” process, the computer is ready to be used.
A customized software image may be deployed by:
■Installing additional software applications after unbundling the preinstalled software image.
■Using software deployment tools, such as Altiris Deployment Solution, to replace the
preinstalled software with a customized software image.
■Using a disk cloning process to copy the contents from one hard drive to another.
The best deployment method depends on your information technology environment and
processes. The PC Deployment section of the HP Lifecycle Solutions Web site
(http://whp-sp-orig.extweb.hp.com/country/us/en/solutions.html) provides information to help
you select the best deployment method.
The Restore Plus! CD, ROM-based setup, and ACPI hardware provide further assistance with
recovery of system software, configuration management and troubleshooting, and power
management.
3–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Desktop Management
3.1.1 Altiris Deployment Solution Agent
This program is pre-loaded on the computer. When installed, it enables communication with the
administrator Deployment Solution console.
To install Altiris Deployment Solution Agent:
1. Click Start.
2. Click All Programs.
3. Click Software Setup.
4. Click Next.
5. Scroll down and click on the link to install Altiris AClient.
3.1.2 HP Local Recovery
Local Recovery backs-up data and system files to a protected area on the hard drive. If data or
files are lost, deleted, or corrupted, Local Recovery can be used to retrieve data or restore the last
good system image.
To install this pre-loaded program:
1. Click Start.
2. Click Local Recovery.
3. Click Next.
4. Scroll down and click on the link to install HP Local Recovery.
3.2 Remote System Installation
Remote System Installation allows you to start and set up your system using the software and
configuration information located on a network server by initiating the Preboot Execution
Environment (PXE). The Remote System Installation feature is usually used as a system setup
and configuration tool, and can be used for the following tasks:
■Formatting a hard drive.
■Deploying a software image on one or more new PCs.
■Remotely updating the system BIOS in flash ROM. See Section 3.4.1, “Remote ROM
Flash.”
■Configuring the system BIOS settings.
To initiate Remote System Installation, press F12 when the F12 = Network Service Boot
message appears in the lower-right corner of the HP logo screen. Follow the instructions on the
screen to continue the process. The default boot order is a BIOS configuration setting that can be
changed to always attempt to PXE boot.
HP and Altiris have partnered to provide tools designed to make the task of corporate PC
deployment and management easier and less time-consuming, ultimately lowering the total cost
of ownership and making HP PCs the most manageable client PCs in the enterprise environment.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 3–3
Desktop Management
3.3 Software Updating and Management
HP provides several tools for managing and updating software on desktops, workstations, and
notebooks:
■HP System Software Manager
■HP Client Manager
■HP Client Management Solutions using Altiris
■HP Local Recovery
■Dantz Backup and Recovery
■HP Proactive Change Notification
■HP Subscriber's Choice
3.3.1 HP System Software Manager
HP System Software Manager (SSM) is a free utility that automates remote deployment of
device drivers and BIOS updates for networked HP business PCs. When SSM runs, it silently
(without user interaction) determines the revision levels of drivers and BIOS installed on each
networked client system and compares this inventory against system software SoftPaqs that have
been tested and stored in a central file store. SSM then automatically updates any down-revision
system software on the networked PCs to the later levels available in the file store. Since SSM
only allows distribution of SoftPaq updates to the correct client system models, administrators
can confidently and efficiently use SSM to keep system software updated.
System Software Manager integrates with enterprise software distribution tools such as
Microsoft Systems Management Server (SMS). Using SSM, you can distribute customer-created
or third-party updates that have been packaged in the SSM-format.
SSM may be downloaded at no charge by visiting www.hp.com/go/ssm.
3.3.2 HP Client Manager
HP Client Manager, developed with Altiris, is available free for supported HP business desktop,
notebook, and workstation models. SSM is integrated into HP Client Manager and enables
central tracking, monitoring, and management of the hardware aspects of HP client systems.
Use HP Client Manager to:
■Get valuable hardware information such as CPU, memory, video, and security settings
■Monitor system health to fix problems before they occur
■Install drivers and BIOS updates without visiting each PC
■Remotely configure BIOS and security settings
■Automate processes to quickly resolve hardware problems
HP Client Manager uses the same Altiris infrastructure as the other Altiris client lifecycle
management solutions. This design provides a significant benefit for the IT staff, since only one
infrastructure needs to be setup and maintained. Since information is stored in one database, you
get complete and consistent inventory reports as well as system health and security information.
You use a single, consistent console interface for scheduling and tracking progress of both
hardware and software management tasks for client systems.
For more information on HP Client Manager, visit www.hp.com/go/easydeploy.
3–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Desktop Management
3.3.3 HP Client Management Solutions using Altiris
Additional Altiris client management solutions can be purchased through HP that complement
the hardware management capabilities of HP Client Manager. These Altiris solutions address
client IT lifecycle challenges including:
■Inventory assessment
■Software license compliance
■Personality migration
■Software image deployment
■Software distribution
■Asset management
■Client backup and recovery
■Problem resolution
For more information on HP Client Management Solutions using Altiris, visit
www.hp.com/go/easydeploy.
HP and Altiris have a unique alliance that extends beyond sales and marketing to include joint
development and technology sharing that spans HP Client, Server, OpenView, and Services
groups to provide best-of-breed solutions for HP partners and customers.
Starting in 1999, Compaq personal systems group and Altiris entered into an alliance to combine
the strength of Compaq as a pioneer in PC hardware and manageability with the strength of
Altiris' PC deployment and migration capabilities. The relationship expanded into a strategic
alliance with the introduction of comprehensive cost-reducing IT lifecycle management solutions
including the jointly developed HP Client Manager, which provides best-of-breed hardware
management for HP PCs.
Building upon the success of the personal systems group, in 2001 the industry standard servers
group introduced the ProLiant Essentials Rapid Deployment Pack, an OEM version of Altiris
Deployment Solution combined with HP's SmartStart Toolkit. HP utilizes this solution for
provisioning ProLiant servers (including blade servers) as well as Blade PCs, a core component
of HP's Consolidated Client Infrastructure.
Following the HP and Compaq merger, the alliance has continued to expand with the following
offerings:
■Altiris Deployment Solution is available for a free 30-day trial for HP business PCs, after
which a license may be purchased.
■HP Local Recovery, a client backup/recovery utility, is available for free with HP business
PCs.
■Altiris Connector for HP OpenView provides client inventory and event integration with HP
OpenView Network Node Manager, Operations, and Service Desk.
■Altiris Connector for HP Systems Insight Manager enables consolidated deployment and
management of HP clients and servers from the HP Systems Insight Manager console.
HP leads the market by offering a single management solution and console for deploying and
configuring PCs, handhelds, thin clients, and Windows and Linux servers plus rich integration
with HP enterprise management tools. HP offers extensive training and services expertise
available from the HP Services organization and Altiris. This combination of HP Client
Management Solutions and services capability provides the best choice for customers trying to
reduce the cost and complexity of managing client systems.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 3–5
Desktop Management
3.3.4 HP Local Recovery
Local Recovery provides data and system file protection for HP business desktops, notebooks,
and workstations. With Local Recovery, you can quickly recover and get back to work when
information is accidentally deleted or your operating system is corrupted. Designed for
disconnected or seldom-connected users, Local Recovery protects your HP computer's data and
system state through scheduled snapshots stored in a protected area on the local hard disk. You
can initiate a backup or restore by simply clicking your mouse or pressing the F11 key in a
pre-boot environment. System backup and disaster recovery is now easy for all users regardless
of connectivity.
Local Recovery is available for free with HP business PCs. Two additional client recovery
products are also available. Upgrading to these products provides you with additional recovery
features:
■Local Recovery Pro—Provides all the capabilities of Local Recovery plus support for
backup and recovery to a secondary hard drive and for open and locked files. During a
backup snapshot, open/locked file support preserves information in open applications such as
E-mail messages, presentations, and word processing documents.
■Recovery Solution—Provides complete enterprise-level backup and recovery of PCs from a
central administrative console. The solution supports data backup to a protected area on the
local hard disk drive as well as to a network storage area. This network-based recovery
feature provides a high level of protection against data lost due to hard drive failure or stolen
and misplaced PCs.
For more information on HP Local Recovery, visit www.hp.com/go/easydeploy.
3.3.5 Dantz Retrospect Express
Dantz Retrospect Express protects a single Windows desktop or notebook computer. Retrospect
Express allows recovery from data loss due to viruses, newly installed software, user error,
damaged hardware, hardware upgrades, hackers, and lost or stolen computers. It offers a choice
between simple duplicates or comprehensive backups and an intuitive setup wizard to get you up
and running in minutes. Retrospect Express comes with Disaster Recovery built into the product
for the best protection available. Visit http://www.dantz.com/en/partners/oem_solutions.dtml to
view a list of hardware manufacturers who bundle Retrospect with their products and to learn
where to buy these products.
Install Retrospect Express and perform your first backup in less than two minutes. With
Retrospect, you can implement a backup plan by answering a few simple questions. Restores are
quick and painless. When you need to perform a restore, Retrospect Express automatically
locates files even if you do not know which piece of backup media contains the files.
Duplicate Files and Folders to an External Hard Drive with the Push of a Button. The duplicate
operation copies information from the computer's hard drive to the external hard drive. (For
external hard drives with a built-in backup button, duplicates can be initiated simply by pressing
the button.) With duplicates, the files and folders on the external hard drive can be easily viewed,
manipulated, and restored by using Windows Explorer. The duplication process saves space by
overwriting any previous backup data on the external drive and saves time by copying only files
that are new or that have changed since the last backup.
Back Up Multiple Versions of Files and Folders. Comprehensive backups retain prior versions of
files and folders and allow you to roll back a computer to any prior point in time before a
data-corrupting event occurred. Each time a backup operation is performed, Retrospect Express
creates a restore point, which can contain all the information a user needs to retrieve files or
restore an entire computer (disaster recovery)—including all operating system files and settings,
3–6 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Desktop Management
device drivers, and applications and their settings. Restore points are captured quickly and they
provide 100% accurate restores to any point in time that a backup was performed—exceeding the
capability of other backup software.
For more information on Dantz Retrospect Express, visit http://www.dantz.com.
3.3.6 Proactive Change Notification
The Proactive Change Notification program uses the Subscriber's Choice Web site in order to
proactively and automatically:
■Send you Proactive Change Notification (PCN) E-mails informing you of hardware and
software changes to most commercial computers and servers, up to 60 days in advance
■Send you E-mail containing Customer Bulletins, Customer Advisories, Customer Notes,
Security Bulletins, and Driver alerts for most commercial computers and servers
You create your own profile to ensure that you only receive the information relevant to a specific
IT environment. To learn more about the Proactive Change Notification program and create a
custom profile, visit http://h30046.www3.hp.com/subhub.php?jumpid=go/pcn.
3.3.7 Subscriber’s Choice
Subscriber’s Choice is a client-based service from HP. Based on your profile, HP will supply
you with personalized product tips, feature articles, and/or driver and support
alerts/notifications. Subscriber’s Choice Driver and Support Alerts/Notifications will deliver
E-mails notifying you that the information you subscribed to in your profile is available for
review and retrieval. To learn more about Subscriber’s Choice and create a custom profile, visit
http://h30046.www3.hp.com/subhub.php.
3.3.8 Retired Solutions
The Desktop Management Task Force (DMTF) introduced the Desktop Management Interface
(DMI) standard almost ten years ago. Due to new standards adoption such as the Common
Information Model (CIM), the DMTF has initiated end-of-life for DMI. Given other
advancements in HP Client Management Solutions, HP Systems Insight Manager, and
Microsoft's implementation of CIM, known as Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI),
the HP Insight Management Agent is no longer being provided on new HP commercial desktop,
workstation, and notebook models introduced after January 1, 2004.
The Insight Management (IM) Agent provided the following features:
■DMI support allowed a client system to be managed by Insight Manager 7 or other
DMI-compliant management applications.
■A Web agent allowed the system to be managed both locally and remotely by a web browser.
■Health alerting could notify the user locally or be sent to a central console.
Insight Manager has been replaced by HP Systems Insight Manager Software (HP SIM). HP SIM
uses WMI to retrieve client system information. The Altiris Connector for HP Systems Insight
Manager is available and enables the HP Client Management Solutions through the HP SIM
console.
HP Client Management Solutions support reporting of health alerts to a system management
console or optionally to be displayed locally on the client computer. Microsoft WMI is standard
with Windows 2000 and Windows XP. WMI provides hardware inventory and alert information
directly through the Windows OS to a system management application.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 3–7
Desktop Management
3.4 ROM Flash
The computer's BIOS is stored in a programmable flash ROM (read only memory). By
establishing a setup password in the Computer Setup (F10) Utility, you can protect the ROM
from being unintentionally updated or overwritten. This is important to ensure the operating
integrity of the computer. Should you need or want to upgrade the BIOS, you may download the
latest BIOS images from the HP driver and support page:
http:\\h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
CAUTION: For maximum ROM protection, be sure to establish a setup password. The setup password
prevents unauthorized ROM upgrades. System Software Manager allows the system administrator to set
the setup password on one or more PCs simultaneously. For more information, visit
http://www.hp.com/go/ssm.
3.4.1 Remote ROM Flash
Remote ROM Flash allows the system administrator to safely upgrade the ROM on remote HP
computers directly from the centralized network management console. Enabling the system
administrator to perform this task remotely on multiple computers results in a consistent
deployment of, and greater control over, HP PC BIOS images over the network. It also results in
greater productivity and lower total cost of ownership.
✎The computer must be powered on, or turned on through Remote Wakeup, to take advantage of
Remote ROM Flash.
For more information on Remote ROM Flash, refer to the HP Client Manager or System
Software Manager at http://h18000.www1.hp.com/im/prodinfo.html.
3.4.2 HPQFlash
The HPQFlash utility is used to locally update or restore the system BIOS on individual PCs
through a Windows operating system.
For more information on HPQFlash, visit http://www.hp.com/support/files and enter the product
name/number of the computer when prompted.
3.4.3 Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode
Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode permits system recovery in the unlikely event of a ROM
flash failure. For example, if a power failure were to occur during a BIOS upgrade, the ROM
flash would be incomplete. This would render the system BIOS unusable. The Boot Block is a
flash-protected section of the ROM that contains code that checks for a valid system BIOS image
when the system is turned on.
■If the system BIOS image is valid, the system starts normally.
■If the system BIOS image is not valid, a failsafe Boot Block BIOS provides enough
support to:
❏search removable media for BIOS image files. If an appropriate BIOS image file is
found, it is automatically flashed into the ROM.
❏start the system from bootable removable media that automatically invokes system BIOS
upgrade utilities.
3–8 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Desktop Management
When an invalid system BIOS image is detected, the system power LED will blink red 8 times,
one blink every second. Simultaneously, the speaker will beep 8 times. If the portion of the
system ROM containing the video option ROM image is not corrupt, “Boot Block Emergency
Recovery Mode” will be displayed on the screen.
To recover the system after it enters Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode, complete the
following steps:
1. Turn off the power.
2. Insert a diskette, CD, or USB flash device containing the desired BIOS image file in the root
directory. Note: The media must be formatted using the FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32 file
system.
3. Turn on the computer.
If no appropriate BIOS image file is found, the failsafe Boot Block BIOS will attempt to start
the system from a bootable device. If no bootable device is found, you will be prompted to
insert media containing a BIOS image file or BIOS upgrade utility.
If the system successfully reprograms the ROM, the system will automatically power off.
4. Remove the removable media used to upgrade the BIOS.
5. Turn the power on to restart the computer.
3.4.4 Replicating the Setup
The following procedures give an administrator the ability to easily copy one setup configuration
to other computers of the same model. This allows for faster, more consistent configuration of
multiple computers.
✎Both procedures require a diskette drive or a supported USB flash media device, such as an HP
Drive Key.
Copying to Single Computer
ÄCAUTION: A setup configuration is model-specific. File system corruption may result if source and target
computers are not the same model. For example, do not copy the setup configuration from a dc7nnn
Ultra-Slim Desktop to a dx6nnn Slim Tower.
1. Select a setup configuration to copy. Turn off the computer. If you are in Windows, click
Start > Shut Down > Shut Down.
2. If you are using a USB flash media device, insert it now.
3. Turn on the computer.
4. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
✎If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and press
and hold the F10 key again to access the utility.
If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you may see a Keyboard Error message—disregard it.
5. If you are using a a diskette, insert it now.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 3–9
Desktop Management
6. Select File > Replicated Setup > Save to Removable Media. Follow the instructions on the
screen to create the configuration diskette or USB flash media device.
7. Turn off the computer to be configured and insert the configuration diskette or USB flash
media device.
8. Turn on the computer to be configured.
9. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
10. Select File > Replicated Setup > Restore from Removable Media, and follow the
instructions on the screen.
11. Restart the computer when the configuration is complete.
Copying to Multiple Computers
ÄCAUTION: A setup configuration is model-specific. File system corruption may result if source and target
computers are not the same model. For example, do not copy the setup configuration from a dc7nnn
Ultra-Slim Desktop to a dx6nnn Slim Tower.
This method takes a little longer to prepare the configuration diskette or USB flash media device,
but copying the configuration to target computers is significantly faster.
✎A bootable diskette is required for this procedure or to create a bootable USB flash media device.
If Windows XP is not available to use to create a bootable diskette, use the method for copying to
a single computer instead (see “Copying to Single Computer”).
1. Create a bootable diskette or USB flash media device. See “Supported USB Flash Media
Device” or “Unsupported USB Flash Media Device.”
ÄCAUTION: Not all computers can be booted from a USB flash media device. If the default boot order in
the Computer Setup (F10) Utility lists the USB device before the hard drive, the computer can be booted
from a USB flash media device. Otherwise, a bootable diskette must be used.
2. Select a setup configuration to copy. Turn off the computer. If you are in Windows, click
Start > Shut Down > Shut Down.
3. If you are using a USB flash media device, insert it now.
4. Turn on the computer.
5. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
✎If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and press
and hold the F10 key again to access the utility.
If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you may see a Keyboard Error message—disregard it.
6. If you are using a diskette, insert it now.
7. Select File > Replicated Setup > Save to Removable Media. Follow the instructions on the
screen to create the configuration diskette or USB flash media device.
3–10 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Desktop Management
8. Download a BIOS utility for replicating setup (repset.exe) and copy it onto the configuration
diskette or USB flash media device. To obtain this utility, go to
http://www.hp.com/support/files and enter the model number of the computer.
9. On the configuration diskette or USB flash media device, create an autoexec.bat file
containing the following command:
repset.exe
10. Turn off the computer to be configured. Insert the configuration diskette or USB flash media
device and turn the computer on. The configuration utility will run automatically.
11. Restart the computer when the configuration is complete.
Creating a Bootable Device
Supported USB Flash Media Device
Supported devices have a preinstalled image to simplify the process of making them bootable.
All HP or Compaq and most other USB flash media devices have this preinstalled image. If the
USB flash media device being used does not have this image, use the procedure later in this
section (see “Unsupported USB Flash Media Device”).
To create a bootable USB flash media device, you must have:
■A supported USB flash media device.
■A bootable DOS diskette with the FDISK and SYS programs. (If SYS is not available,
FORMAT may be used, but all existing files on the USB flash media device will be lost.)
■A PC that is bootable from a USB flash media device.
ÄCAUTION: Not all computers can be booted from a USB flash media device. If the default boot order in
the Computer Setup (F10) Utility lists the USB device before the hard drive, the computer can be booted
from a USB flash media device. Otherwise, a bootable diskette must be used.
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Insert the USB flash media device into one of the computer’s USB ports and remove all other
USB storage devices except USB diskette drives.
3. Insert a bootable DOS diskette with FDISK.COM and either SYS.COM or FORMAT.COM
into a diskette drive and turn on the computer to boot to the DOS diskette.
4. Run FDISK from the A:\ prompt by typing FDISK and pressing Enter. If prompted, click Yes
(Y) to enable large disk support.
5. Enter Choice [5] to display the drives in the system. The USB flash media device will be the
drive that closely matches the size of one of the drives listed. It will usually be the last drive
in the list. Note the letter of the drive.
USB flash media device drive: __________
ÄCAUTION: If a drive does not match the USB flash media device, do not proceed. Data loss can occur.
Check all USB ports for additional storage devices. If any are found, remove them, reboot the computer,
and proceed from step 4. If none are found, either the system does not support the USB flash media
device or the USB flash media device is defective. DO NOT proceed in attempting to make the USB flash
media device bootable.
6. Exit FDISK by pressing the Esc key to return to the A:\ prompt.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 3–11
Desktop Management
7. If your bootable DOS diskette contains SYS.COM, go to step 8. Otherwise, go to step 9.
8. At the A:\ prompt, enter SYS x: where x represents the drive letter noted above.
ÄCAUTION: Be sure that you have entered the correct drive letter for the USB flash media device.
After the system files have been transferred, SYS will return to the A:\ prompt. Go to
step 13.
9. Copy any files you want to keep from your USB flash media device to a temporary directory
on another drive (for example, the system's internal hard drive).
10. At the A:\ prompt, enter FORMAT /S X: where X represents the drive letter noted before.
ÄCAUTION: Be sure that you have entered the correct drive letter for the USB flash media device.
FORMAT will display one or more warnings and ask you each time whether you want to
proceed. Enter Y each time. FORMAT will format the USB flash media device, add the
system files, and ask for a Volume Label.
11. Press Enter for no label or enter one if desired.
12. Copy any files you saved in step 9 back to your USB flash media device.
13. Remove the diskette and reboot the computer. The computer will boot to the USB flash
media device as drive C.
✎The default boot order varies from computer to computer, and it can be changed in the Computer
Setup (F10) Utility.
If you have used a DOS version from Windows 9x, you may see a brief Windows logo screen. If
you do not want this screen, add a zero-length file named LOGO.SYS to the root directory of the
USB flash media device.
Return to “Copying to Multiple Computers.”
Unsupported USB Flash Media Device
To create a bootable USB flash media device, you must have:
■A supported USB flash media device.
■A bootable DOS diskette with the FDISK and SYS programs. (If SYS is not available,
FORMAT may be used, but all existing files on the USB flash media device will be lost.)
■A PC that is bootable from a USB flash media device.
ÄCAUTION: Not all computers can be booted from a USB flash media device. If the default boot order in
the Computer Setup (F10) Utility lists the USB device before the hard drive, the computer can be booted
from a USB flash media device. Otherwise, a bootable diskette must be used.
1. If there are any PCI cards in the system that have SCSI, ATA RAID, or SATA drives
attached, turn off the computer and unplug the power cord.
ÄCAUTION: The power cord MUST be unplugged.
2. Open the computer and remove the PCI cards.
3–12 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Desktop Management
3. Insert the USB flash media device into one of the computer's USB ports and remove all other
USB storage devices except USB diskette drives. Close the computer cover.
4. Plug in the power cord and turn on the computer.
5. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
✎If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and press
and hold the F10 key again to access the utility.
If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you may see a Keyboard Error message—disregard it.
6. Go to Advanced > PCI Devices to disable both the PATA and SATA controllers. When
disabling the SATA controller, note the IRQ to which the controller is assigned. You will
need to reassign the IRQ later. Exit setup, confirming the changes.
SATA IRQ: __________
7. Insert a bootable DOS diskette with FDISK.COM and either SYS.COM or FORMAT.COM
into a diskette drive and turn on the computer to boot to the DOS diskette.
8. Run FDISK and delete any existing partitions on the USB flash media device. Create a new
partition and mark it active. Exit FDISK by pressing the Esc key.
9. If the system did not automatically restart when exiting FDISK, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to
reboot to the DOS diskette.
10. At the A:\ prompt, type FORMAT C: /S and press Enter. Format will format the USB flash
media device, add the system files, and ask for a Volume Label.
11. Press Enter for no label or enter one if desired.
12. Turn off the computer and unplug the power cord. Open the computer and re-install any PCI
cards that were previously removed. Close the computer cover.
13. Plug in the power cord, remove the diskette, and turn on the computer.
14. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
15. Go to Advanced > PCI Devices and re-enable the PATA and SATA controllers that were
disabled in step 6. Put the SATA controller on its original IRQ.
16. Save the changes and exit. The computer will boot to the USB flash media device as drive C.
✎The default boot order varies from computer to computer, and it can be changed in the Computer
Setup (F10) Utility. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on the Documentation and
Diagnostics CD for instructions.
If you have used a DOS version from Windows 9x, you may see a brief Windows logo screen. If
you do not want this screen, add a zero-length file named LOGO.SYS to the root directory of the
USB flash media device.
Return to “Copying to Multiple Computers.”
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 3–13
Desktop Management
3.4.5 Dual-State Power Button
With Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) enabled, the power button can
function either as an on/off switch or as a standby button. The stand-by feature does not
completely turn off power, but instead causes the computer to enter a low-power standby state.
This allows you to power down quickly without closing applications and to return quickly to the
same operational state without any data loss.
To change the power button’s configuration, complete the following steps:
1. Left click on the Start Button, then select Control Panel > Power Options.
2. In the Power Options Properties, select the Advanced tab.
3. In the Power Button section, select Stand by.
After configuring the power button to function as a standby button, press the power button to put
the system in a very low power state (standby). Press the button again to quickly bring the system
out of standby to full power status. To completely turn off all power to the system, press and hold
the power button for four seconds.
ÄCAUTION: Do not use the power button to turn off the computer unless the system is not responding;
turning off the power without operating system interaction could cause damage to or loss of data on the
hard drive.
3.4.6 World Wide Web Site
When making the transition to new or revised operating systems, it is important to implement the
support software designed for that operating system. If you plan to run a version of Microsoft
Windows that is different from the version included with the computer, you must install
corresponding device drivers and utilities to ensure that all features are supported and
functioning properly.
HP has made the task of locating, accessing, evaluating, and installing the latest support software
easier. You can download the software from http://www.hp.com/support. The Web site contains
the latest device drivers, utilities, and flashable ROM images needed to run the latest Microsoft
Windows operating system on the HP computer.
3.4.7 Building Blocks and Partners
HP management solutions integrate with other systems management applications, and are based
on industry standards, such as:
■Web-Based Enterprise Management (WBEM)
■Windows Management Interface (WMI)
■Wake on LAN Technology
■ACPI
■SMBIOS
■Pre-boot Execution (PXE) support
3–14 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Desktop Management
3.5 Asset Tracking and Security
Asset tracking features incorporated into the computer provide key asset tracking data that can be
managed using HP Systems Insight Manager, HP Client Manager or other system management
applications. Seamless, automatic integration between asset tracking features and these products
enables you to choose the management tool that is best suited to the environment and to leverage
the investment in existing tools.
HP also offers several solutions for controlling access to valuable components and information.
HP Embedded Security for ProtectTools, if installed, prevents unauthorized access to data and
checks system integrity and authenticates third-party users attempting system access. (For more
information, refer to the HP ProtectTools Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com.) Security
features such as HP Embedded Security for ProtectTools, the Smart Cover Sensor and the Smart
Cover Lock, available on some models, help to prevent unauthorized access to the internal
components of the personal computer. By disabling parallel, serial, or USB ports, or by disabling
removable media boot capability, you can protect valuable data assets. Memory Change and
Smart Cover Sensor alerts can be automatically forwarded to system management applications to
deliver proactive notification of tampering with a computer’s internal components.
✎HP Embedded Security for ProtectTools, the Smart Cover Sensor, and the Smart Cover Lock are
available as options on some systems.
Use the following utilities to manage security settings on the HP computer:
■Locally, using the Computer Setup Utilities. See the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on
the Documentation and Diagnostics CD included with the computer for additional
information and instructions on using the Computer Setup Utilities.
■Remotely, using HP Client Manager or System Software Manager. This software enables the
secure, consistent deployment and control of security settings from a simple command-line
utility.
The following table and sections refer to managing security features of the computer locally
through the Computer Setup (F10) Utilities.
Computer Setup Utilities (F10) Security Features
Feature Description
Smart Card Options Allows you to enable/disable the Smart Card to be used in
place of the Power-On Password.
Setup Password Allows you to set and enable setup (administrator) password.
✎If the setup password is set, it is required to change
Computer Setup options, flash the ROM, and make changes
to certain plug and play settings under Windows.
Power-On Password Allows you to set and enable power-on password.
✎For more information about Computer Setup, see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Support for security features may vary depending on your specific computer configuration.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 3–15
Desktop Management
Password Options
(This selection will appear only
if a power-on password is set.)
Allows you to:
• Lock legacy resources (appears if a setup password is set).
• Enable/disable network server mode.
• Specify whether the password is required for warm boot
(CTRL+ALT+DEL) (appears if a power-on password is
set).
Smart Cover Allows you to:
• Enable/disable the Cover Lock.
• Enable/disable the Cover Removal Sensor.
✎Notify User alerts the user that the sensor has detected that
the cover has been removed. Setup Password requires that
the setup password be entered to boot the computer if the
sensor detects that the cover has been removed.
This feature is supported on some models only and will only
appear if a Smart Card reader is attached to the system.
Embedded Security Allows you to:
• Enable/disable the Embedded Security device.
• Reset the device to Factory Settings.
• Enable/disable power-on authentication support. (some
models)
• Reset authentication credential. (some models)
Device Security Enables/disables serial ports, parallel port, front USB ports,
system audio, internal speakers (some models) network
controllers (some models), MultiBay devices (some models),
SMBus controller (some models), SCSI controllers (some
models), and Embedded security device (some models).
Network Service Boot Enables/disables the computer’s ability to boot from an
operating system installed on a network server. (Feature
available on NIC models only; the network controller must
reside on the PCI bus or be embedded on the system board.)
System IDs Allows you to set:
• Asset tag (18-byte identifier) and ownership Tag (80-byte
identifier displayed during POST).
Chassis serial number or Universal Unique Identifier
(UUID) number. The UUID can only be updated if the
current chassis serial number is invalid. (These ID numbers
are normally set in the factory and are used to uniquely
identify the system.)
• Keyboard locale setting (for example, English or German)
for System ID entry.
Computer Setup Utilities (F10) Security Features (Continued)
Feature Description
✎For more information about Computer Setup, see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Support for security features may vary depending on your specific computer configuration.
3–16 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Desktop Management
DriveLock (some models) Allows you to assign or modify a master or user password for
certain ATA hard drives. When this feature is enabled, the user
is prompted to provide one of the DriveLock passwords during
POST. If neither is successfully entered, the hard drive will
remain inaccessible until one of the passwords is successfully
provided during a subsequent cold-boot sequence.
✎This selection will only appear when at least one drive that
supports ATA Security is attached to the system.
OS Security (some models) • Data Execution Prevention (some models)
(enable/disable). Helps prevent OS security breaches.
✎This selection is in effect only if the processor and operating
system being used comprehend and utilize this feature.
• Intel Virtualization Technology (some models)
(enable/disable). Changing this setting requires turning
the computer off and then back on.
✎This selection is in effect only if the processor and operating
system being used comprehend and utilize this feature.
Data Execution Prevention
(some models)
Enable/Disable.
Data Execution Prevention Mode help prevent OS security
breaches.
✎This selection is in effect only if the processor and operating
system being used comprehend and utilize the function.
Computer Setup Utilities (F10) Security Features (Continued)
Feature Description
✎For more information about Computer Setup, see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Support for security features may vary depending on your specific computer configuration.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 3–17
Desktop Management
3.5.1 Password Security
The power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the computer by requiring entry of a
password to access applications or data each time the computer is turned on or restarted. The
setup password specifically prevents unauthorized access to Computer Setup, and can also be
used as an override to the power-on password. That is, when prompted for the power-on
password, entering the setup password instead will allow access to the computer.
A network-wide setup password can be established to enable the system administrator to log in to
all network systems to perform maintenance without having to know the power-on password,
even if one has been established.
3.5.2 Establishing a Setup Password Using Computer Setup
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools
Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com. Establishing a setup password through Computer
Setup prevents reconsideration of the computer (use of the Computer Setup (F10) utility) until
the password is entered.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
✎If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and press
and hold the F10 key again to access the utility.
If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you may see a Keyboard Error message—disregard it.
Mechanical Security Features
Feature Purpose How It Is Established
Memory Change Alerts Detects when memory modules
have been added, moved, or
removed; notifies user and
system administrator.
For information on enabling
Memory Change Alerts, refer
to the online Desktop
Management Guide on the
Documentation and
Diagnostics CD.
Cable Lock Provision Inhibits access to the interior of
the computer to prevent
unwanted configuration
changes or component
removal. Can also be used to
secure the computer to a fixed
object to prevent theft.
Install a cable lock to secure
the computer to a fixed
object.
Security Loop Provision Inhibits access to the interior of
the computer to prevent
unwanted configuration
changes or component
removal.
Install a lock in the security
loop to prevent unwanted
configuration changes or
component removal.
3–18 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Desktop Management
3. Select Security, then select Setup Password and follow the instructions on the screen.
4. Before exiting, Select File > Save Changes and Exit.
3.5.3 Establishing a Power-On Password Using Computer Setup
Establishing a power-on password through Computer Setup prevents access to the computer
when power is turned on, unless the password is entered. When a power-on password is set,
Computer Setup presents Password Options under the Security menu. Password options include
Password Prompt on Warm Boot. When Password Prompt on Warm Boot is enabled, the
password must also be entered each time the computer is rebooted.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
✎If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and press
and hold the F10 key again to access the utility.
If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you may see a Keyboard Error message—disregard it.
3. Select Security, then Power-On Password and follow the instructions on the screen.
4. Before exiting, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
Entering a Power-On Password
To enter a power-on password, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. When the key icon appears on the monitor, type the current password, then press Enter.
✎Type carefully; for security reasons, the characters you type do not appear on the screen.
If you enter the password incorrectly, a broken key icon appears. Try again. After three
unsuccessful tries, you must turn off the computer, then turn it on again before you can continue.
Entering a Setup Password
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools
Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com.
If a setup password has been established on the computer, you will be prompted to enter it each
time you run Computer Setup.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
✎If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and press
and hold the F10 key again to access the utility.
If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you may see a Keyboard Error message—disregard it.
3. When the key icon appears on the monitor, type the setup password, then press Enter.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 3–19
Desktop Management
✎Type carefully; for security reasons, the characters you type do not appear on the screen.
If you enter the password incorrectly, a broken key icon appears. Try again. After three
unsuccessful tries, you must turn off the computer, then turn it on again before you can continue.
Changing a Power-On or Setup Password
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools
Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
✎If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and press
and hold the F10 key again to access the utility.
If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you may see a Keyboard Error message—disregard it.
3. When the key icon appears, type the current password, a slash (/) or alternate delimiter
character, the new password, another slash (/) or alternate delimiter character, and the new
password again as shown:
current password/new password/new password
✎Type carefully; for security reasons, the characters you type do not appear on the screen.
4. Press Enter.
5. The new password takes effect the next time you turn on the computer.
✎Refer to “National Keyboard Delimiter Characters” for information about the alternate delimiter
characters. The power-on password and setup password may also be changed using the Security
options in Computer Setup.
Deleting a Power-On or Setup Password
If the system is equipped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools
Security Manager Guide at www.hp.com.
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
✎If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and press
and hold the F10 key again to access the utility.
If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you may see a Keyboard Error message—disregard it.
3. When the key icon appears, type the current password followed by a slash (/) or alternate
delimiter character as shown:
current password/
4. Press Enter.
3–20 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Desktop Management
✎Refer to the National Keyboard Delimiter Character table below for information about the
alternate delimiter characters. The power-on password and setup password may also be changed
using the Security options in Computer Setup.
National Keyboard Delimiter Characters
Each keyboard is designed to meet country-specific requirements. The syntax and keys that you
use for changing or deleting your password depend on the keyboard that came with your
computer.
Clearing Passwords
If you forget the password, you cannot access the computer. Refer to the Troubleshooting Guide
on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for instructions on clearing passwords.
If the system is equiped with an embedded security device, refer to the HP ProtectTools Security
Manager Guide at www.hp.com.
3.5.4 DriveLock
DriveLock is an industry-standard security feature that prevents unauthorized access to the data
on ATA hard drives. DriveLock has been implemented as an extension to Computer Setup. It is
only available when hard drives that support the ATA Security command set are detected.
DriveLock is intended for HP customers for whom data security is the paramount concern. For
such customers, the cost of the hard drive and the loss of the data stored on it is inconsequential
when compared with the damage that could result from unauthorized access to its contents. In
order to balance this level of security with the practical need to accommodate a forgotten
password, the HP implementation of DriveLock employs a two-password security scheme. One
password is intended to be set and used by a system administrator while the other is typically set
and used by the end-user. There is no “back-door” that can be used to unlock the drive if both
passwords are lost. Therefore, DriveLock is most safely used when the data contained on the
hard drive is replicated on a corporate information system or is regularly backed up.
National Keyboard Delimiter Characters
Arabic / Greek - Russian /
Belgian = Hebrew . Slovakian -
BHCSY* - Hungarian - Spanish -
Brazilian / Italian - Swedish/Finnish /
Chinese / Japanese / Swiss -
Czech - Korean / Taiwanese /
Danish -Latin American -Thai /
French ! Norwegian - Turkish .
French Canadian é Polish - U.K. English /
German - Portuguese - U.S. English /
* For Bosnia-Herzegovina, Croatia, Slovenia, and Yugoslavia
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 3–21
Desktop Management
In the event that both DriveLock passwords are lost, the hard drive is rendered unusable. For
users who do not fit the previously defined customer profile, this may be an unacceptable risk.
For users who do fit the customer profile, it may be a tolerable risk given the nature of the data
stored on the hard drive.
Using DriveLock
The DriveLock option appears under the Security menu in Computer Setup. The user is
presented with options to set the master password or to enable DriveLock. A user password must
be provided in order to enable DriveLock. Since the initial configuration of DriveLock is
typically performed by a system administrator, a master password should be set first. HP
encourages system administrators to set a master password whether they plan to enable
DriveLock or keep it disabled. This will give the administrator the ability to modify DriveLock
settings if the drive is locked in the future. Once the master password is set, the system
administrator may enable DriveLock or choose to keep it disabled.
If a locked hard drive is present, POST will require a password to unlock the device. If a
power-on password is set and it matches the device’s user password, POST will not prompt the
user to re-enter the password. Otherwise, the user will be prompted to enter a DriveLock
password. Either the master or the user password may be used. Users will have two attempts to
enter a correct password. If neither attempt succeeds, POST will continue but the drive will
remain inaccessible.
DriveLock Applications
The most practical use of the DriveLock security feature is in a corporate environment. The
system administrator would be responsible for configuring the hard drive which would involve,
among other things, setting the DriveLock master password. In the event that the user forgets the
user password or the equipment is passed on to another employee, the master password can
always be used to reset the user password and regain access to the hard drive.
HP recommends that corporate system administrators who choose to enable DriveLock also
establish a corporate policy for setting and maintaining master passwords. This should be done to
prevent a situation where an employee intentionally or unintentionally sets both DriveLock
passwords before leaving the company. In such a scenario, the hard drive would be rendered
unusable and require replacement. Likewise, by not setting a master password, system
administrators may find themselves locked out of a hard drive and unable to perform routine
checks for unauthorized software, other asset control functions, and support.
For users with less stringent security requirements, HP does not recommend enabling DriveLock.
Users in this category include personal users or users who do not maintain sensitive data on their
hard drives as a common practice. For these users, the potential loss of a hard drive resulting
from forgetting both passwords is much greater than the value of the data DriveLock has been
designed to protect. Access to Computer Setup and DriveLock can be restricted through the
Setup password. By specifying a Setup password and not giving it to end users, system
administrators are able to restrict users from enabling DriveLock.
3–22 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Desktop Management
3.5.5 Smart Cover Sensor
Cover Removal Sensor, available on some models, is a combination of hardware and software
technology that can alert you when the computer cover or side panel has been removed. There are
three levels of protection, as described in the following table.
Setting the Smart Cover Sensor Protection Level
To set the Smart Cover Sensor protection level, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
✎If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and press
and hold the F10 key again to access the utility.
If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you may see a Keyboard Error message—disregard it.
3. Select Security > Smart Cover > Cover Removal Sensor, and select the desired security
level.
4. Before exiting, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
Smart Cover Lock
The Smart Cover Lock is a software-controllable cover lock featured on some HP computers.
This lock prevents unauthorized access to the internal components. Computers ship with the
Smart Cover Lock in the unlocked position.
ÄCAUTION: For maximum cover lock security, be sure to establish a setup password. The setup password
prevents unauthorized access to the Computer Setup utility.
✎The Smart Cover Lock is available as an option on some systems.
Smart Cover Sensor Protection Levels
Level Setting Description
Level 0 Disabled Smart Cover Sensor is disabled (default).
Level 1 Notify User When the computer is restarted, the screen
displays a message indicating that the
computer cover or side panel has been
removed.
Level 2 Setup Password When the computer is restarted, the screen
displays a message indicating that the
computer cover or side panel has been
removed. You must enter the setup
password to continue.
✎These settings can be changed using Computer Setup. For more information about Computer
Setup, see the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 3–23
Desktop Management
Locking the Smart Cover Lock
To activate and lock the Smart Cover Lock, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
✎If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and press
and hold the F10 key again to access the utility.
If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you may see a Keyboard Error message—disregard it.
3. Select Security > Smart Cover > Cover Lock > Lock option.
4. Before exiting, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock
1. Turn on or restart the computer. If you are in Windows, click Start > Shut Down > Restart.
2. As soon as the computer is turned on, press and hold the F10 key until you enter Computer
Setup. Press Enter to bypass the title screen, if necessary.
✎If you do not press the F10 key at the appropriate time, you must restart the computer and press
and hold the F10 key again to access the utility.
If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you may see a Keyboard Error message—disregard it.
3. Select Security > Smart Cover > Cover Lock > Unlock.
4. Before exiting, select File > Save Changes and Exit.
Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key
If you enable the Smart Cover Lock and cannot enter your password to disable the lock, you will
need a Smart Cover FailSafe Key to open the computer cover. You will need the key in any of the
following circumstances:
■Power outage
■Startup failure
■PC component failure (such as processor or power supply)
■Forgotten password
ÄCAUTION: The Smart Cover FailSafe Key is a specialized tool available from HP. Be prepared; order
this key before you need one (Tamper-resistant wrench PN 166527-001 or tamper-resistant bits PN
166527-002).
For more information about using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key, consult the Hardware
Reference Guide.
3–24 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Desktop Management
3.5.6 Cable Lock Provision
The rear panel of the computer accommodates a cable lock so that the computer can be
physically secured to a work area. For illustrated instructions, please see the Removal and
Replacement chapter for the specific chassis.
3.5.7 TPM Embedded Security Chip and HP ProtectTools Security
Manager
The TPM Embedded Security Chip uses a root key protected in silicon to enhance native
Microsoft operating system file and folder encryption and lay the foundation for authentication
of TPM-enabled PCs to the corporate network.
HP ProtectTools Security Manager can be configured to prevent unauthorized access using Smart
Cards, TPM Embedded security chips, USB tokens and other security technologies. HP
ProtectTools Security Manager is completely customizable, providing the flexibility to choose
the level of security that best meets customers’ needs.
For more information on HP Business PC security solutions, visit
http://h18004.www1.hp.com/products/security.
3.6 Fault Notification and Recovery
Fault Notification and Recovery features combine innovative hardware and software technology
to prevent the loss of critical data and minimize unplanned downtime.
If the computer is connected to a network managed by HP Client Manager, the computer sends a
fault notice to the network management application. With HP Client Manager, you can also
remotely schedule diagnostics to automatically run on all managed PCs and create a summary
report of failed tests.
3.6.1 Drive Protection System
The Drive Protection System (DPS) is a diagnostic tool built into the hard drives installed in
some HP computers. DPS is designed to help diagnose problems that might result in unwarranted
hard drive replacement.
When HP computers are built, each installed hard drive is tested using DPS, and a permanent
record of key information is written onto the drive. Each time DPS is run, test results are written
to the hard drive. Your service provider can use this information to help diagnose conditions that
caused you to run the DPS software. Refer to the Troubleshooting Guide for instructions on using
DPS.
3.6.2 Surge-Tolerant Power Supply
An integrated surge-tolerant power supply provides greater reliability when the computer is hit
with an unpredictable power surge. This power supply is rated to withstand a power surge of up
to 2000 volts without incurring any system downtime or data loss.
3.6.3 Thermal Sensor
The thermal sensor is a hardware and software feature that tracks the internal temperature of the
computer. This feature displays a warning message when the normal range is exceeded, which
gives you time to take action before internal components are damaged or data is lost.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 4–1
4
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and
Features
✎Serial ATA = SATA
Parallel ATA = PATA
HP only supports the use of a MultiBay PATA (IDE) hard drive on this model of computer.
3.5-inch PATA hard drives are not supported.
4.1 SATA 1.5 and 3.0 Hard Drives
SATA connectors on the system board are color coded to make identification easier.
✎If there is an error on the application of the attach rules, a POST error message may be displayed.
Serial ATA Hard Drive Characteristics
Number of pins/conductors in data cable 7/7
Number of pins in power cable 15
Maximum data cable length 39.37 in (100 cm)
Data interface voltage differential 400-700 mV
Drive voltages 3.3 V, 5V, 12 V
Jumpers for configuring drive N/A
Data transfer rate, 40 GB 1.5 Gb/s
3.0 Gb/s (some models)
Data transfer rate, 80 GB and greater 3.0 Gb/s
SATA Identification Color Port
Attachment
Sequence
Primary channel, device 0 Dark blue SATA 0 1
Primary channel, device 1 Light Blue SATA 2 4
Secondary channel, device 0 White SATA 1 2
Secondary channel, device 1 Orange SATA 3 3
4–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features
4.2 SATA Hard Drive Cables
4.2.1 SATA Data Cable
Always use an HP approved SATA 3.0 Gb/s cable as it is fully backwards compatible with the
SATA 1.5 Gb/s drives.
Current HP desktop products ship with SATA 3.0 Gb/s hard drives.
SATA data cables are susceptible to damage if overflexed. Never crease a SATA data cable and
never bend it tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
The SATA data cable is a thin, 7-pin cable designed to transmit data for only a single drive. As
shown in the table, each cable has 3 grounds, and 4 transmit/receive pins.
4.2.2 SATA Power Cable
Pin Number Usage Device Plug Host Plug
P1 Ground Ground Ground
P2* A+ Transmit data Receive data
P3* A- Transmit data Receive data
P4 Ground Ground Ground
P5** B- Receive data Transmit data
P6** B+ Receive data Transmit data
P7 Ground Ground Ground
*P2 and P3 differential signal pair
**P5 and P6 differential signal pair
Pin Usage Notes Pin Usage Notes
P1 V3.3 3.3 V power P9 V5 5 V power
P2 V3.3 3.3 V power P10 Ground
P3 V3.3 3.3 V power P11 Ground
P4 Ground P12 Ground
P5 Ground P13 V 12 12 V power
P6 Ground P14 V12 12 V power
P7 V5 5 V power P15 V12 12 V power
P8 V5 5 V power
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 4–3
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features
4.3 PATA Device Information
This information applies to optical drives in a computer having one or two SATA drive
controllers and a single PATA drive controller.
Only a MultiBay PATA hard drive is supported on these computers. No other PATA hard drives
are supported on these models.
4.4 PATA Cables
4.4.1 PATA Data Cable
Parallel ATA MultiBay Hard Drive Characteristics
Number of pins/conductors in data cable 40/80
Number of pins in power cable 4
Maximum data cable length 18 in (45.7 cm)
Data interface voltage 5V
Drive voltages 5V
Jumpers for configuring drive Required
Data transfer rate 24 MB/s
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
Reset
Ground
DD7
DD8
DD6
15
16
17
18
19
DD1
DD14
DD0
DD15
Ground
29
30
31
32
33
DMAK
Ground
INTRQ
IOCS16
DA1
6
7
8
9
10
DD9
DD5
DD10
DD4
DD11
20
21
22
23
24
(Key)
DMARQ
Ground
DIOW
Ground
34
35
36
37
38
PDIAG (cable detect)
DA0
DA2
CS1FX
CS3FX
11
12
13
14
DD3
DD12
DD2
DD13
25
26
27
28
DIOR
Ground
IORDY
CSEL
39
40
DASP
Ground
4–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features
4.4.2 PATA Power Cable
4.5 PATA Drive Installation Guidelines
The computer system boards for these products have one Parallel ATA (PATA) channel with a
single connector. The channel can have up to two devices attached to it. All drives are connected
to the channel using an industry-standard 80-conductor cable.
✎The industry-standard 1.44 MB diskette drive has its own separate channel and is not included as
a part of the maximum four drives.
Each drive attached to a channel must have a drive designation. If a drive is attached to the
Device 0 cable position and its cable-select jumper is present, the drive is designated as Device 0.
Similarly, if a drive is attached to the Device 1 cable position and its cable-select jumper is
present, the drive is designated as Device 1.
For optimal performance of a computer system, all drives need to be attached to the PATA
channel(s) in a specified sequence. This sequence is determined by the device class of the drives
and by specific attach sequence rules.
4.5.1 PATA Device Classes
In order to determine the best drive attach sequence, ATA/ATAPI drives are segregated into four
different classes based upon the bandwidth demands they place on an ATA channel. The most
demanding devices are in Class 1 and the least demanding are in Class 4.
General Attach Guidelines
■The lower the device class number, the faster the device and the more bandwidth required.
■Drives installed in the Device 0 position receive the greatest possible bandwidth.
■The bootable ATA hard drive should always be installed in the Device 0 position.
Pin Usage
1 +12 V
2Ground
3Ground
4+5 V
Class 1
Hard
Drives
Class 2
High Speed
Optical Drives
Class 3
Optical Storage
Drives
Class 4
Magnetic
Storage Drives
Supported
only on USDT
chassis with
MultiBay
DVD
DVD-CD R/W
R/W CD-ROM
CD-ROM
Zip
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 4–5
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features
4.6 ATA SMART Drives
The Self Monitoring Analysis and Recording Technology (SMART) ATA drives for the HP
Personal Computers have built-in drive failure prediction that warns the user or network
administrator of an impending failure or crash of the hard drive. The SMART drive tracks fault
prediction and failure indication parameters such as reallocated sector count, spin retry count,
and calibration retry count. If the drive determines that a failure is imminent, it generates a fault
alert.
4.7 Drive Capacities
The combination of the file system and the operating system used in the computer determines the
maximum usable size of a drive partition. A drive partition is the largest segment of a drive that
may be properly accessed by the operating system. A single hard drive may therefore be
subdivided into a number of unique drive partitions in order to make use of all of its space.
Because of the differences in the way that drive sizes are calculated, the size reported by the
operating system may differ from that marked on the hard drive or listed in the computer
specification. Drive size calculations by drive manufacturers are bytes to the base 10 while
calculations by Microsoft are bytes to the base 2.
4.8 SATA BIOS
Drive/Partition Capacity Limits
Maximum Size
File
System
Controller
Type Operating System
Partition Drive
FAT 32 ATA Windows 2000/ XP 32 GB 128 PB
NTFS ATA Windows NT/2000/XP 2 TB 128 PB
Windows 2000 and XP Windows 9x, NT, and Linux
Enhanced Mode (default BIOS Setting)
—Separate IDE controller
Compatibility Mode (non-default BIOS Setting)
—Combined IDE controller
•PATA Controller in Legacy Mode
- Device 0 is accessible as Device 0 of
PATA controller’s Primary Channel
- Device 1 is accessible as Device 1of
PATA controller’s Primary Channel
•SATA Controller in Native Mode
- SATA 0 is accessible as Device 0 of
SATA controller’s Primary Channel
- SATA 1 is accessible as Device 0 of
SATA controller’s Secondary Channel
SATA 2 is accessible as Device 1of
SATA controller’s Primary Channel
- SATA 3 is accessible as Device 1 of
SATA controller’s Secondary Channel
•PATA Controller in Legacy Mode
- Device 0 is accessible as Device 0 of the
combined controller’s Secondary
Channel
- Device 1 is accessible as Device 1of the
combined controller’s Secondary
Channel
•SATA Controller in Legacy Mode
- SATA 0 is accessible as Device 0 of the
combined controller’s Primary Channel
- SATA 1 is inaccessible
- SATA 2 is accessible as device 1 of the
combined controller’s Primary Channel
- SATA 3 is inaccessible
4–6 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features
4.8.1 Legacy Mode
The Legacy mode is used to access devices attached to an embedded ATA controller. Each
channel of the controller requires two fixed I/O address ranges and an IRQ.
■Primary Channel
❏Command block: 1F0h - 1F7h
❏Control block: 3F6h
❏IRQ: 14
■Secondary Channel
❏Command block: 170h - 177h
❏Control block: 376h
❏IRQ: 15
4.8.2 Native Mode
The native mode is used to access devices attached to additional ATA controllers and is not
supported by many legacy operating systems. Addresses are assigned by PCI Plug-n-Play BIOS
and the IRQ is shared with multiple controllers. Base Address Registers for the Command and
Control Block are found in the PCI Configuration Space.
■Offset 10h—Primary Command base address
■Offset 14h—Primary Control base address
■Offset 18h—Secondary Command base address
■Offset 1Ch—Secondary Control base address
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 4–7
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features
4.9 Mixed Devices Boot and Drive Letter Ordering
SATA Emulation Hard Drive Order
HDD Boot and Drive
Letter Ordering
Separate IDE Controller
(default). Used with Windows
2000 and XP.
A. Integrated SATA
B. Integrated IDE
A1. SATA 0
A2. SATA 2
A3. SATA 1
A4. SATA 3
B1. IDE Device 0
B2. IDE Device 1
Separate IDE Controller. Used
with Windows 2000 and XP.
A. Integrated IDE
B. Integrated SATA
A1. IDE Device 0
A2. IDE Device 1
B1. SATA 0
B2. SATA 2
B3. SATA 1
B4. SATA 3
Combined with IDE
Controller. Used with
Windows 9x, NT, and Linux.
A. Integrated SATA
B. Integrated IDE
A1. SATA 0
A2. SATA 2
B1. IDE Device 0
B2. IDE Device 1
Combined with IDE
Controller. Used with
Windows 9x, NT, and Linux.
A. Integrated IDE
B. Integrated SATA
A1. IDE Device 0
A2. IDE Device 1
B1. SATA 0
B2. SATA 2
4–8 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 5–1
5
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and
Disassembly Preparation
This chapter provides general service information for the computer. Adherence to the procedures
and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper service.
ÄCAUTION: When the computer is plugged into an AC power source, voltage is always applied to the
system board. You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the computer
to prevent system board or component damage.
5.1 Chassis Designations
5.1.1 Convertible Minitower (CMT)
5–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.1.2 Small Form Factor (SFF)
5.1.3 Ultra-Slim Desktop
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 5–3
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.2 Electrostatic Discharge Information
A sudden discharge of static electricity from your finger or other conductor can destroy
static-sensitive devices or microcircuitry. Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, but damage
occurs. An electronic device exposed to electrostatic discharge (ESD) may not appear to be
affected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. The device may function
normally for a while, but it has been degraded in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy.
Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in many cases, the
discharge contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions.
5.2.1 Generating Static
The following table shows that:
■Different activities generate different amounts of static electricity.
■Static electricity increases as humidity decreases.
✎700 volts can degrade a product.
5.2.2 Preventing Electrostatic Damage to Equipment
Many electronic components are sensitive to ESD. Circuitry design and structure determine the
degree of sensitivity. The following packaging and grounding precautions are necessary to
prevent damage to electric components and accessories.
■To avoid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers such as tubes, bags, or
boxes.
■Protect all electrostatic parts and assemblies with conductive or approved containers or
packaging.
■Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free stations.
■Place items on a grounded surface before removing them from their container.
■Always be properly grounded when touching a sensitive component or assembly.
■Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
■Place reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies in protective packaging or
conductive foam.
Relative Humidity
Event 55% 40% 10%
Walking across carpet
Walking across vinyl floor
Motions of bench worker
Removing DIPs* from plastic tube
7, 5 0 0 V
3,000 V
400 V
400 V
15,000 V
5,000 V
800 V
700 V
35,000 V
12,000 V
6,000 V
2,000 V
Removing DIPs* from vinyl tray
Removing DIPs* from Styrofoam
Removing bubble pack from PCB
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box
2,000 V
3,500 V
7,000 V
5,000 V
4,000 V
5,000 V
20,000 V
11,000 V
11,500 V
14,500 V
26,500 V
21,000 V
*These are then multi-packaged inside plastic tubes, trays, or Styrofoam.
5–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.2.3 Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment
Use the following equipment to prevent static electricity damage to equipment:
■Wrist straps are flexible straps with a maximum of one-megohm ± 10% resistance in the
ground cords. To provide proper ground, a strap must be worn snug against bare skin. The
ground cord must be connected and fit snugly into the banana plug connector on the
grounding mat or workstation.
■Heel straps/Toe straps/Boot straps can be used at standing workstations and are
compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats,
use them on both feet with a maximum of one-megohm ± 10% resistance between the
operator and ground.
5.2.4 Grounding the Work Area
To prevent static damage at the work area, use the following precautions:
■Cover the work surface with approved static-dissipative material. Provide a wrist strap
connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment.
■Use static-dissipative mats, foot straps, or air ionizers to give added protection.
■Handle electrostatic sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCB
laminate. Handle them only at static-free work areas.
■Turn off power and input signals before inserting and removing connectors or test
equipment.
■Use fixtures made of static-safe materials when fixtures must directly contact dissipative
surfaces.
■Keep work area free of nonconductive materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and
Styrofoam.
■Use field service tools, such as cutters, screwdrivers, and vacuums, that are conductive.
5.2.5 Recommended Materials and Equipment
Materials and equipment that are recommended for use in preventing static electricity include:
■Antistatic tape
■Antistatic smocks, aprons, or sleeve protectors
■Conductive bins and other assembly or soldering aids
■Conductive foam
■Conductive tabletop workstations with ground cord of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance
■Static-dissipative table or floor mats with hard tie to ground
■Field service kits
Static Shielding Protection Levels
Method Voltage
Antistatic plastic
Carbon-loaded plastic
Metallized laminate
1,500
7,500
15,000
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 5–5
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
■Static awareness labels
■Wrist straps and footwear straps providing one-megohm +/- 10% resistance
■Material handling packages
■Conductive plastic bags
■Conductive plastic tubes
■Conductive tote boxes
■Opaque shielding bags
■Transparent metallized shielding bags
■Transparent shielding tubes
5.3 Operating Guidelines
To prevent overheating and to help prolong the life of the computer:
■Keep the computer away from excessive moisture, direct sunlight, and extremes of heat and
cold.
■Operate the computer on a sturdy, level surface. Leave a 10.2-cm (4-inch) clearance on all
vented sides of the computer and above the monitor to permit the required airflow.
■Never restrict the airflow into the computer by blocking any vents or air intakes. Do not place
the keyboard, with the keyboard feet down, directly against the front of the desktop unit as
this also restricts airflow.
■Occasionally clean the air vents on all vented sides of the computer. Lint, dust, and other
foreign matter can block the vents and limit the airflow. Be sure to unplug the computer
before cleaning the air vents.
■Never operate the computer with the cover or side panel removed.
■Do not stack computers on top of each other or place computers so near each other that they
are subject to each other’s re-circulated or preheated air.
■If the computer is to be operated within a separate enclosure, intake and exhaust ventilation
must be provided on the enclosure, and the same operating guidelines listed above will still
apply.
■Keep liquids away from the computer and keyboard.
■Never cover the ventilation slots on the monitor with any type of material.
■Install or enable power management functions of the operating system or other software,
including sleep states.
5.4 Routine Care
5.4.1 General Cleaning Safety Precautions
1. Never use solvents or flammable solutions to clean the computer.
2. Never immerse any parts in water or cleaning solutions; apply any liquids to a clean cloth
and then use the cloth on the component.
3. Always unplug the computer when cleaning with liquids or damp cloths.
5–6 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
4. Always unplug the computer before cleaning the keyboard, mouse, or air vents.
5. Disconnect the keyboard before cleaning it.
6. Wear safety glasses equipped with side shields when cleaning the keyboard.
5.4.2 Cleaning the Computer Case
Follow all safety precautions in Section 5.4.1 before cleaning the computer.
To clean the computer case, follow the procedures described below:
■To remove light stains or dirt, use plain water with a clean, lint-free cloth or swab.
■For stronger stains, use a mild dishwashing liquid diluted with water. Rinse well by wiping it
with a cloth or swab dampened with clear water.
■For stubborn stains, use isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol. No rinsing is needed as the alcohol will
evaporate quickly and not leave a residue.
■After cleaning, always wipe the unit with a clean, lint-free cloth.
■Occasionally clean the air vents on the computer. Lint and other foreign matter can block the
vents and limit the airflow.
5.4.3 Cleaning the Keyboard
Follow all safety precautions in Section 5.4.1 before cleaning the keyboard.
To clean the tops of the keys or the keyboard body, follow the procedures described in Section
5.4.2.
When cleaning debris from under the keys, review all rules in Section 5.4.1 before following
these procedures:
ÄCAUTION: Use safety glasses equipped with side shields before attempting to clean debris from under
the keys.
■Visible debris underneath or between the keys may be removed by vacuuming or shaking.
■Canned, pressurized air may be used to clean debris from under the keys. Caution should be
used as too much air pressure can dislodge lubricants applied under the wide keys.
■If you remove a key, use a specially designed key puller to prevent damage to the keys. This
tool is available through many electronic supply outlets.
ÄCAUTION: Never remove a wide leveled key (like the space bar) from the keyboard. If these keys are
improperly removed or installed, the keyboard may not function properly.
■Cleaning under a key may be done with a swab moistened with isopropyl alcohol and
squeezed out. Be careful not to wipe away lubricants necessary for proper key functions. Use
tweezers to remove any fibers or dirt in confined areas. Allow the parts to air dry before
reassembly.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 5–7
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.4.4 Cleaning the Monitor
■Wipe the monitor screen with a clean cloth moistened with water or with a towelette
designed for cleaning monitors. Do not use sprays or aerosols directly on the screen; the
liquid may seep into the housing and damage a component. Never use solvents or flammable
liquids on the monitor.
■To clean the monitor body follow the procedures in Section 5.4.2.
5.4.5 Cleaning the Mouse
Before cleaning the mouse, ensure that the power to the computer is turned off.
■Clean the mouse ball by first removing the retaining plate and the ball from the housing. Pull
out any debris from the ball socket and wipe the ball with a clean, dry cloth before
reassembly.
■To clean the mouse body, follow the procedures in Section 5.4.2.
5.5 Service Considerations
Listed below are some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during the disassembly
and assembly of the computer.
5.5.1 Power Supply Fan
The power supply fan is a variable-speed fan based on the temperature in the power supply.
ÄCAUTION: The cooling fan is always on when the computer is in the “On” mode. The cooling fan is off
when the computer is in “Standby,” “Suspend,” or “Off” modes.
You must disconnect the power cord from the power source before opening the computer to prevent
system board or component damage.
5.5.2 Tools and Software Requirements
To service the computer, you need the following:
■Torx T-15 screwdriver (HP screwdriver with bits, PN 161946-001)
■Torx T-15 screwdriver with small diameter shank (for certain front bezel removal)
■Flat-bladed screwdriver (may sometimes be used in place of the Torx screwdriver)
■Phillips #2 screwdriver
■Diagnostics software
■HP tamper-resistant T-15 wrench (Smart Cover FailSafe Key, PN 166527-001) or
HP tamper-resistant bits (Smart Cover FailSafe Key, PN 166527-002)
5–8 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.5.3 Screws
The screws used in the computer are not interchangeable. They may have standard or metric
threads and may be of different lengths. If an incorrect screw is used during the reassembly
process, it can damage the unit. HP strongly recommends that all screws removed during
disassembly be kept with the part that was removed, then returned to their proper locations.
✎Metric screws have a black finish.
U.S. screws have a silver finish and are used on hard drives only.
✎As each subassembly is removed from the computer, it should be placed away from the work
area to prevent damage.
5.5.4 Cables and Connectors
Most cables used throughout the unit are flat, flexible cables. These cables must be handled with
care to avoid damage. Apply only the tension required to seat or unseat the cables during
insertion or removal from the connector. Handle cables by the connector whenever possible. In
all cases, avoid bending or twisting the cables, and ensure that the cables are routed in such a way
that they cannot be caught or snagged by parts being removed or replaced.
ÄCAUTION: When servicing this computer, ensure that cables are placed in their proper location during
the reassembly process. Improper cable placement can damage the computer.
5.5.5 Hard Drives
Handle hard drives as delicate, precision components, avoiding all physical shock and vibration.
This applies to failed drives as well as replacement spares.
■If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective
packaging and label the package “Fragile: Handle With Care.”
■Do not remove hard drives from the shipping package for storage. Keep hard drives in their
protective packaging until they are actually mounted in the CPU.
■Avoid dropping drives from any height onto any surface.
■If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, turn off the computer. Do not remove a hard
drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.
■Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a
drive, avoid touching the connector. For more information about preventing electrostatic
damage, refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information.”
■Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
■Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic
fields such as monitors or speakers.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 5–9
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
5.5.6 Lithium Coin Cell Battery
The battery that comes with the computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a
minimum lifetime of about three years.
See the appropriate removal and replacement chapter for the chassis you are working on in this
guide for instructions on the replacement procedures.
ÅWARNING: This computer contains a lithium battery. There is a risk of fire and chemical burn if the
battery is handled improperly. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, dispose in
water or fire, or expose it to temperatures higher than 140ºF (60ºC). Do not attempt to recharge the
battery.
NBatteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general
household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public
collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.
5–10 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–1
6
Removal and Replacement Procedures -
Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper
service. After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the diagnostics
utility to verify that all components operate properly.
✎Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
6.1 Preparation for Disassembly
See Chapter 5, “Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation” for initial
procedures.
1. Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer (Section 6.2,
“Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock” and Section 6.4, “External Security Devices”).
2. Close any open software applications.
3. Exit the operating system.
4. Remove any diskette, compact disc, or MultiBay device from the computer.
5. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
ÄCAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
ÄCAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as
the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be disconnected
before servicing a unit.
6. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
8. Lay the computer down on its side to achieve a safe working position.
✎During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing. Keep all
screws with the units removed.
ÄCAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the wrong
screw in an application may damage the unit.
6–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.2 Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock
If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock use Computer Setup to unlock the lock. Refer to the
Desktop Management Guide on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for more information
about the Smart Cover Lock.
If you cannot access Computer Setup to unlock the cover you will need to remove the locking
solenoid by using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key (Spare part number 166527-001 or
166527-002). Once the solenoid has been deactivated or removed the access panel can be
removed.
The Smart Cover FailSafe Key will be needed in any of the following circumstances:
■Power outage
■Startup failure
■Processor or power supply failure
■Lost password
1. Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key, remove the two tamper-proof screws that secure the
Smart Cover Lock to the inside of the chassis.
2. Remove the access panel (Section 6.5).
To reattach the Smart Cover Lock, secure the lock in place with the two tamper-proof screws.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–3
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.3 Hood Sensor
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Disconnect the hood sensor cable from the system board.
4. Slide the hood sensor switch towards the front of the computer 1 and lower it down through
the slot 2.
To install the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedure.
6–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.4 External Security Devices
6.4.1 Cable Lock
The cable lock may be used to secure the computer access panel to the chassis and, at the same
time, secure the computer to a fixed object.
6.4.2 Padlock
A padlock may be used by itself to secure the access panel to the computer chassis. A padlock
may also be used with a security cable to secure the computer to a fixed object.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–5
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.5 Computer Access Panel
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
ÄCAUTION: Before removing the computer access panel, ensure that the computer is turned off and that
the power cord is disconnected from the electrical outlet.
2. Lift up on the access panel handle 1, slide the access panel back about 2.5 cm (1 inch), then
lift it off the unit 2.
To install the computer cover, reverse the removal procedure.
6–6 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.6 Front Bezel
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Push up on the two release tabs 1, then rotate the front bezel away from the chassis to
release it 2.
To reinstall the front bezel, reverse the removal procedure
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–7
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.7 Front Drive Bezels
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
6.7.1 5.25” Drive Bezel Blank
Gently pull the subpanel, with the bezel blanks secured in it, away from the front bezel, then
remove the desired bezel blank.
ÄCAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when pulling it away from the front bezel. Pulling the subpanel
away at an angle could damage the pins that align it with the front bezel.
To install a bezel blank, reverse the removal procedure.
✎When replacing the subpanel, ensure that the aligning pins and any remaining bezel blanks are in
their proper orientation. The logo in the subpanel should be located at the bottom of the subpanel
when properly oriented.
6–8 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.7.2 Diskette Drive Bezel or Bezel Blank
Press up on the two small retaining clips 1 on the bottom of the bezel insert, press down on the
two small retaining clips 2 on the top of the insert, and push the cover out of the front bezel 3.
To install a bezel or a bezel blank, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–9
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.8 Cable Management
Always follow good cable management practices when working inside the computer.
■Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heatsink.
■Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like
these are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.
■Keep cables clear of sliding or moveable parts to prevent them from being cut or crimped
when the parts are moved.
■When folding a flat ribbon cable, never fold to a sharp crease. Sharp creases may damage the
wires.
■Some flat ribbon cables come prefolded. Never change the folds on these cables.
■Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.
■Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
■Never crease a SATA data cable.
■Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push
cables down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.
When removing the power supply power cables from the P1 or P3 connectors on the system
board, always follow these steps:
1. Squeeze on the top of the retaining latch attached to the cable end of the connector 1.
2. Grasp the cable end of the connector and pull it straight up 2.
ÄCAUTION: Always pull the connector - NEVER pull on the cable. Pulling on the cable could damage the
cable and result in a failed power supply.
6–10 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.9 Memory
CAUTION: The memory module sockets have gold metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or oxidation
resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
ÄCAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards.
Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching
a grounded metal object. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more information.
ÄCAUTION: When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so
may damage the module.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
ÅWARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to
cool before touching.
3. Open both latches of the memory module socket 1, and insert the memory module into the
socket 2. Refer to Appendix F, “Memory” for the correct sequence for installing memory
modules to get optimal performance.
✎A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with the tab
on the memory socket.
4. Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and
properly seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position 3.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for any additional modules that you want to install.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–11
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
✎The computer automatically recognizes the additional memory when the computer is turned on.
To reassemble the computer, reverse the removal procedure.
✎If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and enable
the Smart Cover Sensor.
6–12 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.10 Expansion Cards
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Locate the correct vacant expansion socket on the system board and the corresponding
expansion slot on the back of the computer chassis.
4. Push down and out on the two green thumb tabs inside the chassis and rotate the expansion
card retention latch up.
5. If you are installing an expansion card in a vacant socket, remove the appropriate expansion
slot cover on the back of the chassis. Pull the slot cover straight up to release it from the
chassis frame.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–13
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6. If you are removing an expansion card from a standard expansion socket, hold the card at
each end and carefully rock it back and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket.
Lift the expansion card straight up to release it from the chassis frame. Be sure not to scrape
the card against other components.
✎Before removing an installed expansion card, disconnect any cables that may be attached to the
expansion card.
6–14 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
7. If you are removing a PCI Express card from a x16 PCI Express socket with a retention
mechanism, pull the retention arm away from the socket then carefully rock the card back
and forth until the connectors pull free from the socket. Lift the expansion card straight up
then pull it in toward the center of the chassis to release it from the chassis frame. Be sure not
to scrape the card against other components.
8. Store the removed card in anti-static packaging.
9. If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the
open slot and continue with step 12.
If you are installing a new expansion card, continue with step 11.
ÄCAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or expansion slot
cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–15
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
10. Slide the bracket on the end of the expansion card down into the slot on the back of the
chassis and press the card down firmly into the socket on the system board.
✎When you install an expansion card, make sure you press firmly on the card so that the whole
connector seats properly in the expansion card socket on the system board.
11. Close the expansion slot latch, making sure that it snaps firmly into place.
12. Connect external cables to the installed card and internal cables to the system board as
needed.
13. Replace the computer access panel.
14. If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and
enable the Smart Cover Sensor.
15. Reconfigure the computer, if necessary. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on
the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for instructions about using Computer Setup.
6–16 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.11 PCI Retainer Latch
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Locate the correct vacant expansion socket on the system board and the corresponding
expansion slot on the back of the computer chassis.
4. Push down and out on the two green thumb tabs inside the chassis and rotate the expansion
card retention latch up.
5. Use a thin flat blade screwdriver to pry up on the broken plastic latches 1, then complete the
removal by pulling the latches off the pivoting bar 2.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–17
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6. Slide the pivoting bar to the right 1, then lift the left end 2 to remove it from the chassis. To
replace the bar, slide it into the socket on the right 1, lower it into position 3, and slide it to
the left 4 to secure it in place.
7. With the bar in a slightly rotated position, install the latches through the openings in the back
of the chassis and press them firmly in place on the rotating bar.
✎The green latches are marked “R” and “L” for your convenience.
6–18 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.12 Expansion Card Guide
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove any expansion cards that might be in the way (Section 6.10).
4. Compress the retaining tabs 1 that secure the card guide to the chassis and remove the guide
from the chassis 2.
To install the expansion card guide, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–19
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.13 Drives
The computer supports up to six drives that may be installed in various configurations.
This Section describes the procedure for replacing or upgrading the storage drives. A Torx T-15
screwdriver is needed to remove and install the guide screws on a drive.
ÄCAUTION: Make sure personal files on the hard drive are backed up to an external storage device
before removing the hard drive. Failure to do so will result in data loss. After replacing the primary hard
drive, you will need to run the Restore Plus! CD to load the factory-installed files.
6.13.1 Drive Positions
To verify the type and size of the storage device installed in the computer, run Computer Setup.
Drive Positions
Item Description Item Description
1*Three 5.25-inch, half-height bays for
optional drive.
3Two internal 3.5-inch, one-third height
bay for hard drives)
2**One standard 3.5-inch, one-third
height bay (1.44-MB diskette drive
shown)*
*The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The bottom bay supports a
drive that is no more than 6.7 inches in depth, including the cables that attach to the back of the drive. Do
not try to force a larger drive into the bottom bay as it could damage the drive and the system board.
**Depending on the computer configuration, you may have a bezel blank in this position. If you do not
have a drive in this slot, you may choose to install a 3.5-inch device (such as a diskette drive, hard drive, or
Zip drive).
6–20 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.13.2 Hard Drive
ÄCAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:
■If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, shut down the operating system properly, then turn off
the computer. Do not remove a hard drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.
■Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more
information about preventing electrostatic damage.
■Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
■Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
■Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the drive.
✎The right-angle data cable must be used for this chassis model when installing hard drives in the
3.5-inch bays to prevent cable damage from overflexing.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–21
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
5. Pull up on the green hard drive drivelock mechanism 1 for that drive and slide the drive from
the drive bay 2.
6. Remove the four guide screws (two on each side) from the old drive and install them in the
replacement drive.
✎Extra guide screws are provided on the chassis. Hard drives use 6-32 standard screws. Optical
drives use M3 metric screws. The HP-supplied metric screws are black. The HP-supplied
standard screws used on hard drives are silver.
7. Store the removed drive in anti-static packaging.
8. Install the new drive by sliding it into the appropriate drive bay on the front of the chassis.
The drivelock automatically secures the drive in the bay.
6–22 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.13.3 Optical Drive
✎An optical drive is a CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, DVD-ROM, DVD-R/RW, or CD-RW/DVD Combo
drive.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
✎If you are adding a drive in a bay that was previously empty, you must remove the corresponding
bezel blank from the front bezel.
4. Disconnect the power and data cables on the back of the drive.
ÄCAUTION: When removing cables, pull the tab or connector instead of the cable itself to prevent
damaging the cable.
5. If the computer is in the desktop mode, continue with step 7.
If the computer is in the minitower mode, continue with step 8.
6. In the desktop mode, press down on the yellow drivelock mechanism 1 and slide the drive
from the drive bay 2.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–23
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
7. In the minitower mode, pull up on the green drivelock mechanism 1 for that specific drive
and slide the drive from the drive bay 2.
8. Remove the four guide screws (two on each side) from the old drive and install them in the
lower set of holes on the optical drive.
✎Extra guide screws are provided on the chassis on the side of the fourth drive bay. Optical drives
use M3 metric screws. The HP-supplied metric screws are black. The HP-supplied standard
screws, used only for hard drives, are silver.
6–24 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
9. After installing the M3 metric guide screws 1, install the drive by sliding it into the
appropriate drive bay on the front of the chassis 2. The drivelock automatically secures the
drive in the bay.
ÄCAUTION: Make sure the guide screws line up with the guide slots in the drive cage. The use of
unnecessary force when installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.
10. When installing an optical drive, the default audio solution is digital audio. No separate
audio cable is required for Windows XP applications.
11. Connect the data and power cables on the to the drive.
✎Refer to Chapter 4, “Serial and Parallel ATA Drive Guidelines and Features” for information on
attaching the cabling to get optimum performance.
12. Replace the front bezel (Section 6.6).
13. Replace the computer access panel (Section 6.5)
14. If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and
enable the Smart Cover Sensor (Section 6.2).
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–25
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.13.4 Diskette Drive
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
4. Pull up on the green hard drive drivelock mechanism 1 and slide the drive from the bay 2.
5. Remove the four guide screws (two on each side) from the old drive and install them in the
replacement drive. Install four guide screws, two on each side of the drive.
✎Extra guide screws are provided on the side of the drive bay under the access panel. The diskette
drive uses M3 metric screws. The HP-supplied metric screws are black. The HP-supplied
standard screws, used only for hard drives, are silver.
6. Insert the diskette drive into the bay from the front of the chassis. Push it in until it locks into
place.
ÄCAUTION: Make sure the guide screws line up with the guide slots in the drive cage. The use of
unnecesary force when installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the drive.
7. Connect the data and power cables to the drive.
8. Replace the front bezel (Section 6.6).
9. Replace the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
10. If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and
enable the Smart Cover Sensor (Section 6.2).
6–26 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.14 Front I/O Device
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
4. Disconnect the two I/O device cables from the system board: the front USB cable pair and
the front audio cable.
5. Remove the two screws that secure the front I/O device to the mounting bracket 1.
6. Remove the two screws that secure the mounting bracket to the chassis 2.
7. Lift the mounting bracket off the chassis 3.
8. Carefully pull the cables from the front of the chassis making sure that they do not snag on
the lower drive cage.
To reinstall the I/O device:
1. Thread the cables through the opening and down the space in front of the lower drive cage.
This step may be easier if you thread a single cable at a time through the opening.
ÄCAUTION: Be careful when threading the cables in the chassis so the cable ends are not damaged.
2. Position the I/O device and the mounting bracket on the front of the chassis and install the
two screws that secure the bracket to the chassis.
3. Install the two screws that secure the I/O device to the mounting bracket.
Complete the reassembly by reinstalling the other parts that had been removed.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–27
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.15 Power Switch Assembly
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
4. Disconnect the power switch/LED cable from the system board.
5. Squeeze the switch holder retaining clips together at the front of the chassis 1 and pull the
switch assembly out of the chassis 2.
To install the power switch assembly, reverse the removal procedure.
✎When installing the power switch cable it may be necessary to disconnect a data cabe from one
of the drives to make it easier to grab the free end of the cable.
6–28 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.16 System Board
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove all PCI expansion boards (Section 6.10).
4. Remove the x16 PCI Express graphics card (Section 6.10).
5. Disconnect all cables connected to the system board, noting their location for reinstallation.
6. Compress the system board tray handle 1 to release the latch and slide the system board tray
towards the front of the computer 2 to free it from the back of the chassis.
To install the system board with its tray, press down on the board to ensure it is latching 1, then
push the board into its locked position 2.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–29
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.17 Battery
The 3-volt lithium coin cell battery that comes with this computer provides power to the
real-time clock and has a lifetime of about three years. When replacing the battery, use a battery
equivalent to the battery originally installed on the computer.
✎The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC wall
socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.
ÅWARNING: This computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of fire and
burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:
■Do not attempt to recharge the battery.
■Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60°C (140°F).
■Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or
water.
■Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.
ÄCAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings. When
the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10)
Utility Guide for information on backing up the CMOS settings.
NBatteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general
household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public
collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.
ÄCAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional
equipment. Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by
briefly touching a grounded metal object.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
✎It may be necessary to remove an expansion card to gain access to the battery.
3. Locate the battery and battery holder on the system board.
4. Depending on the type of battery holder on your system board, complete the following
instructions to replace the battery:
6–30 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.17.1 Type 1 Battery Holder
1. Lift the battery out of its holder.
2. Slide the replacement battery into position, positive side up.
3. The battery holder automatically secures the battery in the proper position.
4. Replace the computer access panel.
5. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
6. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–31
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.17.2 Type 2 Battery Holder
1. To release the battery from its holder, squeeze the metal clamp 1 that extends above one
edge of the battery. When the battery pops up, lift it out.
2. To insert the new battery, slide one edge of the replacement battery under the holder’s lip
with the positive side up 2. Push the other edge down until the clamp snaps over the other
edge of the battery.
3. Replace the computer access panel.
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
6–32 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.17.3 Type 3 Battery Holder
1. Pull back on the clip 1 that holds the battery in place, then remove the battery 2.
2. Insert the new battery and position the clip back in place.
3. Replace the computer access panel.
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–33
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.18 Heatsink
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Disconnect the heatsink control cable from the system board.
4. Uncrew the four captive screws 1 that secure the heatsink to the system board.
ÄCAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
5. Remove the heatsink 2 from atop the processor.
When reinstalling the heatsink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe
and fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.
ÄCAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
6–34 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.19 Processor
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Disconnect the heatsink control cable from the system board and remove the heatsink
(Section 6.18).
4. Rotate the locking lever to its full open position 1.
5. Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position 2.
6. Carefully lift the processor from the socket 3.
ÄCAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and handling
them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to replace the
system board.
ÄCAUTION: The heatsink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage
to the processor’s solder connections.
To install a new processor:
1. Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.
2. Secure the locking lever.
If reusing the existing heatsink, go to step 3.
If using a new heatsink, go to step 5.
3. If reusing the existing heatsink, apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top
of the processor.
4. Clean the bottom of the heatsink with the provided alcohol pad and place it atop the
processor.
5. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and
place it in position atop the processor.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–35
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws and
attach the heatsink control cable to the system board.
ÄCAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
✎After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to ensure
that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can be
found on the Web at: http:\\h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
6–36 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.20 Speaker
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Disconnect the speaker wire from the system board.
4. Remove the four screws from the inside of the chassis 1 that secure the speaker to the
chassis.
5. Remove the speaker 2.
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–37
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.21 Chassis Fan
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Disconnect the fan control cable from the system board.
4. Remove the four screws that secure the fan assembly to the chassis and then remove the fan
assembly.
To install the fan assembly, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow out of
the unit. Refer to the air flow arrows on the side of the fan housing for proper air flow orientation.
6–38 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.22 Power Supply
ÅWARNING: Voltage is always present on the system board when the computer is plugged into an
active AC outlet. To avoid possible personal injury and damage to the equipment the power cord should
be disconnected from the computer and/or the AC outlet before opening the computer.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
1. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
2. Disconnect all power cables from the mass storage devices and from the system board.
3. Remove the four screws that connect the power supply to the chassis 1.
4. Slide the power supply toward the front of the computer 2, then lift it out of the computer.
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–39
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.23 Changing from Desktop to Minitower
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
4. Disconnect all power and data cables from the back of the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
5. To release the drives from the 5.25-inch drive bay, press down on the short yellow drivelock
as shown. While pressing the drivelock, pull the drives out of the drive bay.
6–40 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6. Before you reinstall each drive into the chassis, turn it so that it is in the same orientation as
the internal 3.5-inch drive. The bottom of the drive should be parallel to the yellow drivelock.
7. Slide the drive into the uppermost available bay until it snaps into place. When the drive is
properly inserted, the drivelock will secure it. Repeat this step for each drive.
ÄCAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The bottom
bay supports a drive that is no more than 17 cm (6.7 inches) in depth, including the cables that attach to
the back of the drive. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive or MultiBay drive, into the
bottom bay. This could cause damage to the drive and the system board.
The use of unnecessary force when installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the
drive.
8. Reconnect all power and data cables to the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
9. Remove the bezel subpanel (Section 6.7).
ÄCAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when you pull it away from the front bezel. Pulling the subpanel
away at an angle could damage the pins that align it within the front bezel.
10. Reposition the bezel blanks within the subpanel in the proper orientation for the minitower
configuration.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–41
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
11. Reposition the subpanel (rotate it 90°) with the logo at the bottom, then snap it back into the
bezel.
12. Replace the front bezel and computer access panel.
13. Reconnect the external equipment.
14. If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and
enable the Smart Cover Sensor.
6–42 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6.24 Changing from Minitower to Desktop
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 6.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 6.5).
3. Remove the front bezel (Section 6.6).
4. Disconnect all power and data cables from the back of the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
5. To release the drives from the 5.25-inch drive bay, lift the release tab on the green latch drive
bracket for the drive. While lifting the release tab, slide the drive from its drive bay. Repeat
this step for each 5.25-inch drive.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 6–43
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
6. Before reinstalling each drive into the chassis, turn the drive so that it is perpendicular to the
internal 3.5-inch drive. The drive should be parallel to the green latch drive bracket.
7. Slide the drive into the uppermost available bay until it snaps into place. When the drive is
properly inserted, the drivelock will secure it. Repeat this step for each drive.
ÄCAUTION: The bottom 5.25-inch drive bay has a shorter depth than the upper two bays. The bottom
bay supports a drive that is no more than 17 cm (6.7 inches) in depth, including the cables that attach to
the back of the drive. Do not try to force a larger drive, such as an optical drive or MultiBay drive, into the
bottom bay. This could cause damage to the drive and the system board.
The use of unnecessary force when installing any drive into the drive bay may result in damage to the
drive.
8. Reconnect all power and data cables to the drives in the 5.25-inch drive bays.
9. Remove the bezel subpanel (Section 6.7).
ÄCAUTION: Hold the subpanel straight when you pull it away from the front bezel. Pulling the subpanel
away at an angle could damage the pins that align it within the front bezel.
10. Reposition the bezel blanks within the subpanel in the proper orientation for the desktop
configuration.
6–44 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Convertible Minitower (CMT) Chassis
11. Reposition the subpanel (rotate it 90°) with the logo at the bottom, then snap it back into the
bezel.
12. Replace the front bezel and computer access panel.
13. Reconnect the external equipment.
14. If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and
enable the Smart Cover Sensor.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–1
7
Removal and Replacement Procedures—
Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper
service. After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the Diagnostics
utility to verify that all components operate properly.
✎Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
7.1 Preparation for Disassembly
See Chapter 5, “Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation,”for initial
safety procedures.
1. Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer (Section 7.2,
“Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock,” and Section 7.4, “External Security Devices”).
2. Close any open software applications.
3. Exit the operating system.
4. Remove any diskette, compact disc, or MultiBay device from the computer.
5. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
ÄCAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
ÄCAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as
the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be disconnected
before servicing a unit.
6. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
✎During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing. Keep all
screws with the units removed.
ÄCAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the wrong
screw in an application may damage the unit.
7–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.2 Unlocking the Smart Cover Lock
If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock use Computer Setup to unlock the lock. Refer to the
Desktop Management Guide on the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for more information
about the Smart Cover Lock.
If you cannot access Computer Setup to unlock the cover you will need to remove the locking
solenoid by using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key (Spare part number 166527-001 or
166527-002). Once the solenoid has been deactivated or removed the access panel can be
removed.
The Smart Cover FailSafe Key will be needed in any of the following circumstances:
■Power outage
■Startup failure
■Processor or power supply failure
■Lost password
To open the computer cover with the Smart Cover Lock engaged:
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Using the Smart Cover FailSafe Key, remove the tamper-proof screw 1 that secures the
Smart Cover Lock to the inside of the chassis.
3. Push the metal arm that wraps around the air vent grid up and back 2 to free the Smart Cover
Lock from the chassis.
4. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–3
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
To reattach the Smart Cover Lock:
1. Install the Smart Cover Lock assembly on the inside of the rear panel with the metal arm 1
wrapped around the air vent grid on the back of the chassis.
2. Use the supplied tamper-resistant screw 2 to secure the Smart Cover Lock to the chassis.
7–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.3 Hood Sensor
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly.
2. Remove the computer cover.
3. Remove the special security clip (Section 7.4.1) from the top rear corner of the power supply
cage.
4. Raise the power supply to its full upright position.
5. Disconnect the hood sensor cable from the system board.
6. Slide the hood sensor switch mounted on the power supply towards the outside of the
computer 1 and lower it through the slot 2.
To install the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–5
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.4 External Security Devices
7.4.1 Security Clip
A special clip is required to secure the computer from intrusion. This clip must be installed
before installing the computer cover.
7.4.2 Cable Lock
The cable lock may be used to secure the computer cover to the chassis and, at the same time,
secure the computer to a fixed object.
Insert the cable lock in the location shown below.
7–6 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.4.3 Padlock
A padlock may be used by itself to secure the computer cover to the computer chassis. A padlock
may also be used with a security cable to secure the computer to a fixed object.
I
7.4.4 Universal Chassis Clamp Lock
Without Security Cable
1. Thread the keyboard and mouse cables through the lock.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–7
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
2. Screw the lock to the chassis using the screw provided.
3. Insert the plug into the lock 1 and push the button in 2 to engage the lock. Use the key
provided to disengage the lock.
7–8 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
With Security Cable
1. Fasten the cable by looping it around a stationary object.
2. Thread the keyboard and mouse cables through the lock.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–9
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
3. Screw the lock to the chassis using the screw provided.
4. Insert the plug end of the security cable into the lock 1 and push the button in 2 to engage
the lock. Use the key provided to disengage the lock.
7–10 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.5 Computer Cover
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
ÄCAUTION: Before removing the computer cover, ensure that the computer is turned off and that the
power cord is disconnected from the electrical outlet.
1. Press the buttons on the left and right sides of the computer 1.
2. Slide the computer cover towards the front of the computer until it stops 2, then lift it up and
off the chassis.
To install the computer cover, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–11
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.6 Front D rive Bez els
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the drive bezel by pushing the top tab on the right side of the larger front bezel as
shown 1 and rotating the drive bezel away from the larger front bezel 2.
✎The drive bezel will vary depending on the computer configuration.
4. Install a bezel or a bezel blank by pushing the bezel into place.
7–12 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
There are three drive bezel inserts that are available.
Item Description
1Diskette drive bezel
2Hard drive bezel
33.5” drive bezel
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–13
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.7 Cable Management
The Small Form Factor chassis is a very compact computer and proper routing of the internal
cables is critical to the operation of the computer. Follow good cable management practices when
working inside the computer.
■Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heatsink.
■Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like
these are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.
■Keep cables clear of movable or rotating parts like the power supply and drive cage to
prevent them from being cut or crimped when the component is lowered into its normal
position.
■When folding a flat ribbon cable, never fold to a sharp crease. Sharp creases may damage the
wires.
■Some flat ribbon cables come prefolded. Never change the folds on these cables.
■Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.
■Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
■Never crease a SATA data cable.
■Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push
cables down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.
When removing the power supply power cables from the P1 or P3 connectors on the system
board, always follow these steps:
1. Squeeze on the top of the retaining latch attached to the cable end of the connector 1.
2. Grasp the cable end of the connector and pull it straight up 2.
ÄCAUTION: Always pull the connector - NEVER pull on the cable. Pulling on the cable could damage the
cable and result in a failed power supply.
7–14 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.8 M e m or y
ÄCAUTION: The memory module sockets have gold metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or oxidation
resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
ÄCAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards.
Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching
a grounded metal object. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more information.
ÄCAUTION: When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so
may damage the module.
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock (Section
7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
ÅWARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to
cool before touching.
4. Open both latches of the memory module socket 1, and insert the memory module into the
socket 2. Refer to Appendix F, “Memory” for the correct sequence for installing memory
modules to get optimal performance.
✎A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with the tab
on the memory socket.
5. Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted and
properly seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position 3.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–15
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for any additional modules that you want to install.
✎The computer automatically recognizes the additional memory when the computer is turned on.
To reassemble the computer, reverse the removal procedure.
✎If you normally lock the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to relock the lock and enable
the Smart Cover Sensor.
7–16 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.9 Vertically Oriented Expansion Card
7.9.1 Expansion Card Retainer
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, restart the computer and enter Computer Setup to
unlock the lock.
2. Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external
devices.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
4. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
5. Release the slot cover retention latch that secures the PCI slot covers by lifting the green tab
on the latch and rotating the latch to the full open position 1.
6. Remove the single screw that keeps the card retainer in place 2 and slide the retainer to the
left to remove it from the chassis 3.
To install the card retainer, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–17
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.9.2 PCI Expansion Card
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, restart the computer and enter Computer Setup to
unlock the lock.
2. Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external
devices.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
4. Remove the computer cover. (Section 7.5).
5. Identify the slot into which you want to insert the expansion card.
6. Release the slot cover retention latch that secures the PCI slot covers by lifting the green tab
on the latch and rotating the latch to the full open position 1.
7. Remove the slot cover by sliding it up and out of the computer 2.
7–18 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
8. Install the expansion card by sliding the card under the slot cover retention latch then
pressing the card down into the slot on the system board.
✎Be sure not to scrape other components in the chassis when installing an expansion card.
9. Rotate the slot cover retention latch back in place to secure the expansion card.
✎When you install an expansion card, make sure the metal bracket on the card slides into the slot
on the back of the computer then press down firmly on the card so that the whole connector seats
properly in the expansion card slot.
ÄCAUTION: All expansion card slots on the rear of the computer must contain either an expansion card
or slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–19
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.9.3 PCI Express Expansion Card
To remove a PCI Express expansion card:
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, restart the computer and enter Computer Setup to
unlock the lock.
2. Turn off the computer properly through the operating system, then turn off any external
devices.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect any external devices.
4. Remove the computer cover. (Section 7.5).
5. Release the slot cover retention latch on the back of the computer that secures the PCI slot
covers by lifting the green tab on the latch and rotating the latch to the open position.
6. Pull the retention arm on the back of the PCI Express expansion socket away from the card
(on x16 card socket only) and carefully rock the card back and forth until the connectors pull
free from the socket. Pull the expansion card straight up from the socket then away from the
inside of the chassis. Be sure not to scrape the card against the other components.
7. If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the
open slot.
8. Rotate the slot cover retention latch back in place to secure the expansion cards and
expansion slot covers.
ÄCAUTION: All expansion card slots on the rear of the computer must contain either an expansion card
or slot cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
7–20 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.10 PCI Riser Card Assembly and Backwall
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock (Section
7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
4. Remove all PCI and PCI Express expansion cards from the PCI expansion slots (Section
7.9).
5. Rotate the optical and diskette drive cage to its upright position.
6. Remove the security clip (Section 7.4.1), rotate the power supply to its full upright position
1, then lift the power supply straight up and out of the chassis 2.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–21
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7. Disconnect the data and power cables from the system board.
8. Disconnect the “Serial A” cable from the system board 1, remove the two screws that secure
the serial connector to the backwall 2, then remove the serial connector 3.
9. Remove the fan shroud by lifting it up and out (Section 7.12).
7–22 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
10. Remove the long mounting screw that secures the system board tray to the chassis.
11. Slide the system board tray assembly towards the front of the chassis about 1/4 inch and lift
the system board up and out of the chassis.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–23
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
12. Remove the three screws that secure the backwall assembly to the chassis 1, then slide the
backwall assembly a few millimeters/inches toward the space vacated by the power supply
and lift out 2.
13. Slide the new backwall onto the rear chassis 1. Secure it with the three screws removed from
the old backwall 2.
7–24 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
14. Install the serial connector into the new backwall 1 using the two screws that were removed
from the serial connector in a previous step 2. Reconnect the “Serial A” cable to the system
board 3.
15. Install the system board tray assembly. Be sure the keyhole slot on the system board sits
properly over the locking pins. When the system board is in position, replace the long
mounting screw to secure the system board to the chassis.
16. Reconnect all power and data cables to the system board. Be sure to use proper cable
handling and placement precautions.
17. Install the power supply. Rotate it to its normal operating position. Be sure to use proper
cable handling and placement precautions.
18. Install the full-height PCI expansion card in the available slot in the new PCI riser card cage
assembly.
19. Install the new PCI riser card cage assembly on the new backwall by aligning the cage with
the guide rails on the backwall. Press down firmly on the cage to secure it in place on the
backwall. Be sure the riser card in the cage is properly seated in the PCI expansion slot on
the system board.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–25
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
20. Rotate the drive cage back down to its normal position. Be sure to use proper cable handling
and placement precautions.
ÄCAUTION: Cables are very sensitive. Overbending, creasing, or pinching can damage cables.
21. Replace the fan shroud on top of the fan.
22. Replace the computer cover.
7–26 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.11 Drives
A Torx T-15 screwdriver is needed to remove and install the guide screws on a drive.
ÄCAUTION: Make sure personal files on the hard drive are backed up to an external storage device
before removing the hard drive. Failure to do so will result in data loss. After replacing the primary hard
drive, you will need to run the Restore Plus! CD to load the HP factory-installed files.
7.11.1 Drive Positions
To verify the type and size of the storage device installed in the computer, run Computer Setup.
Drive Positions
Item Description Item Description
13.5-inch, internal, standard hard
drive bay
33.5-inch drive bay (1.44-MB
diskette drive shown)*
25.25-inch drive bay for optional
drives
*A 3.5-inch diskette drive, hard drive, or Zip drive may be installed in this bay but the correct
bezel must be installed to ensure proper air flow.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–27
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.11.2 O ptical Drive
ÄCAUTION: All removable media should be taken out of the drives before removing the drive from the
computer.
✎An optical drive is a CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, DVD-ROM, DVD+R/RW, or CD-RW/DVD Combo
drive.
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock (Section
7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
4. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position by pulling on the green-tabbed lip.
7–28 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
5. Disconnect the power and data cables from the rear of the optical drive.
6. Rotate the drive cage down to its normal position before trying to remove the drive.
7. Press the green drive retainer latch and slide the drive forward and lift it from the drive cage.
8. When replacing the drive, transfer the four screws from the old drive to the new one. The
screws take the place of drive rails.
ÄCAUTION: Use only 5-mm long screws as guide screws. Longer screws can damage the internal
components of the drive.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–29
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.11.3 External 3.5-inch Drive
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock (Section
7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
4. Remove the optical drive (Section 7.11.2).
5. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position by pulling on the green-tabbed lip.
6. Disconnect the signal and power cables from the drive. The other end of the cables should
remain connected to the system board. (Diskette drive is shown.)
7. Rotate the drive cage down to its normal position before trying to remove the drive.
7–30 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
8. Press the green drive retention latch 1 located on the side of the diskette drive to disengage
the drive from the drive cage and slide the diskette drive forward approximately 6mm
(1/4 inch) 2.
9. Lift the rear of the drive up so that the rear guide screws clear the top of the drive cage 1.
As the drive rises it automatically slides forward until it is free from the drive cage 2.
To replace the drive, reverse the removal procedure making sure you rotate the rear of the drive
down, pivoting on the front screws.
✎When replacing the drive, transfer the four metric screws from the old drive to the new one. The
screws take the place of drive rails.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–31
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.11.4 Pr im ary H ard D r ive
A Torx T-15 screwdriver is needed to remove and install the guide screws on a hard drive.
ÄCAUTION: Make sure personal files on the hard drive are backed up to an external storage device
before removing the hard drive. Failure to do so will result in data loss. After replacing the primary hard
drive, you will need to run the Restore Plus! CD to load the HP factory-installed files.
ÄCAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:
■If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, shut down the operating system properly, then turn off
the computer. Do not remove a hard drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.
■Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more
information about preventing electrostatic damage.
■Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
■Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
■Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.
1. If you have locked the Smart Cover Lock, use Computer Setup to unlock the lock (Section
7.2).
2. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
3. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
4. Rotate the drive cage to its upright position by pulling on the green-tabbed lip.
✎It is not necessary to remove the drives from the drive cage.
7–32 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
5. Remove the security clip that secures the backwall to the power supply.
6. Rotate the power supply to its full upright position.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–33
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the hard drive.
8. Pull the tab that locks the drive in place away from the drive 1, slide the hard drive toward
the front of the computer, then lift it up and out of the bay 2.
To install a hard drive, reverse the above procedure.
✎The replacement hard drive kit includes several data cables. Make sure to use the cable that is
exactly the same as the factory-installed cable.
✎If the system has only one SATA hard drive, the data cable must be connected to the blue
connector labeled P60 SATA 0 first to avoid any hard drive performance problems.
7–34 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
✎When replacing the hard drive, transfer the four screws from the old drive to the new one. The
screws take the place of drive rails. You will need a Torx T-15 screwdriver to remove and
re-install the guide screws. HP has provided four extra 6-32 standard guide screws on the front of
the chassis, under the computer cover. The 6-32 standard guide screws are silver and are used
only for the hard drive.
✎If you replaced the primary hard drive, insert the Restore Plus! CD to restore the operating
system, software drivers, and any software applications that were preinstalled on the computer.
Follow the instructions in the guide included with the Restore Plus! CD. When the restore
process has completed, reinstall any personal files that you backed up before replacing the hard
drive.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–35
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.12 Fan Shrou d
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Lift up on the fan shroud to remove it from the computer.
When replacing the shroud, make sure that it does not get caught on the wires from either the fan
or the speaker.
7–36 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.13 Front I/O Devices
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the two screws that secure the front I/O device to the chassis 1.
4. Rotate the drive cage to its full upright position.
5. Disconnect the front I/O cable from the system board.
6. Push the front I/O device into the chassis 2 and snake the cable through the tunnel 3 to
remove the device from the chassis.
To reinstall the front I/O device, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–37
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.14 Power Switch Assembly
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Disconnect the power switch/LED cable from the system board.
4. Squeeze the switch holder retaining clips together at the front of the chassis 1 and push the
switch assembly out of the chassis 2. Push the two LEDs out of the chassis 3.
5. If necessary, the LED holders may also be removed by squeezing the clips and pushing them
out of the front of the chassis.
To install the power switch and LEDs, reverse the removal procedure.
7–38 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.15 H ea tsink
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the fan shroud (Section 7.12).
4. Disconnect the fan control cable from the system board.
5. Loosen the four captive screws that secure the heatsink to the system board tray.
ÄCAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
6. Lift the heatsink from atop the processor and set it on its side to keep from contaminating the
work area with thermal grease.
When reinstalling the heatsink, make sure that its bottom has been cleaned with an alcohol wipe
and fresh thermal grease has been applied to the top of the processor.
ÄCAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
ÄCAUTION: Failure to install the fan shroud may cause the computer to overheat.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–39
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.16 Processor
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the fan shroud (Section 7.12).
4. Disconnect the heatsink control cable from the system board and remove the heatsink
(Section 7.15).
5. Rotate the locking lever to its full open position 1.
6. Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position 2.
7. Carefully lift the processor from the socket 3.
ÄCAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and handling
them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to replace the
system board.
ÄCAUTION: The heatsink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage
to the processor’s solder connections.
To install a new processor:
1. Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.
2. Secure the locking lever.
If reusing the existing heatsink, go to step 3.
If using a new heatsink, go to step 6.
7–40 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
3. If reusing the existing heatsink, clean the bottom of the heatsink with the alcohol pad
provided in the spares kit.
ÄCAUTION: Before reinstalling the heatsink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom of the
heatsink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply thermal
grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares kit.
4. Apply the thermal grease provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor and install the
heatsink atop the processor.
5. Go to step 7.
6. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and
place it in position atop the processor.
7. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws and
attach the heatsink control cable to the system board.
ÄCAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
✎After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to ensure
that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can be
found on the Web at: http:\\h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–41
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.17 Spea ker
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the fan shroud (Section 7.12).
4. Remove the heatsink control cable and the heatsink from the system board (Section 7.15).
5. Remove any memory modules that might interfere with the screwdriver used for removing
the speaker.
6. Disconnect the speaker wire from the system board.
7. Remove the two screws that secure the speaker to the chassis 1.
8. Rotate the top of the speaker back to clear the lip on the top of the chassis, then lift the
speaker up and out of the chassis 2.
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedures.
ÄCAUTION: Before reinstalling the heatsink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom of the
heatsink with an alcohol pad supplied in the speaker spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply
thermal grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the speaker spares kit.
7–42 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.18 Power Supply
ÅWARNING: Voltage is always present on the system board when the computer is plugged into an
active AC outlet. To avoid possible personal injury and damage to the equipment the power cord should
be disconnected from the computer and/or the AC outlet before opening the computer.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the security clip.
4. Rotate the drive cage upand disconnect the power cables from all of the drives.
5. Disconnect the power cables from the system board.
6. Release the power supply cable from the cable retaining clips on the bottom of the chassis
under the drive cage.
7. Disconnect the hood sensor from the system board and remove the sensor from the power
supply if required (Section 7.3).
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–43
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
8. Rotate the power supply to its full upright position 1, then lift the power supply straight up
and out of the chassis 2.
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure.
ÄCAUTION: When installing the power supply cables, make sure they are properly positioned so they
are not cut by the drive cage and are not pinched by the rotating power supply.
7–44 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.19 System Board
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove all PCI and PCI Express expansion boards (Section 7.9).
4. Remove the fan shroud from the chassis (Section 7.11).
5. Rotate the drive cage to its full upright position.
6. Remove the security clip (Section 7.4.1) and rotate the power supply to its full upright
position.
7. Disconnect the data and power cables from the system board.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–45
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
8. Disconnect the serial port from the system board.
9. Disconnect the balance of the cables from the system board.
10. Remove the long mounting screw that secures the system board tray to the chassis.
7–46 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
11. Slide the system board tray assembly towards the front of the chassis, about 1/4 inch and lift
the system board up and out of the chassis.
12. Remove the heatsink from the system board and the system board tray (Section 7.15).
To install the system board, reverse the removal procedure.
✎The heatsink should be installed on the system board before the system board is reinstalled in the
chassis.
ÄCAUTION: Before reinstalling the heatsink you must clean the top of the processor and the bottom of the
heatsink with an alcohol pad supplied in the spares kit. After the alcohol has evaporated, apply thermal
grease to the top of the processor from the syringe supplied in the spares kit.
✎When reinstalling the system board it is important to secure the system board and tray to the
chassis with the long retaining screw before performing any subsequent steps.
ÄCAUTION: When reconnecting the cables it is important that they be positioned so they do not interfere
with the rotation of the drive cage or power supply.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–47
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.20 Chassis Fan
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer cover (Section 7.5).
3. Remove the fan shroud (Section 7.12).
4. Disconnect the chassis fan cable from the system board.
5. Remove the four screws that secure the fan to the chassis, then remove the fan from the
chassis.
To install the chassis fan, reverse the removal procedure. Be sure to orient the air flow into the
unit. Refer to the air flow arrows on the side of the fan housing for proper air flow orientation.
7–48 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.21 B at ter y
The battery that comes with this computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a
lifetime of about three years. When replacing the battery, use a battery equivalent to the battery
originally installed on the computer. The computer comes with a 3-volt lithium coin cell battery.
✎The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC wall
socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.
ÅWARNING: This computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of fire and
burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:
■Do not attempt to recharge the battery.
■Do not expose to temperatures higher than 140°F (60°C).
■Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or
water.
■Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.
ÄCAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings. When
the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10)
Utility Guide for information on backing up the CMOS settings.
NBatteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general
household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public
collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.
ÄCAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional
equipment. Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by
briefly touching a grounded metal object.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 7.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 7.5).
✎It may be necessary to remove an expansion card to gain access to the battery.
3. Locate the battery and battery holder on the system board.
4. Carefully pull the cable bundle out of the way to access the battery.
5. Depending on the type of battery holder on your system board, complete the following
instructions to replace the battery:
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–49
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.21.1 Type 1 B at ter y H olde r
1. Lift the battery out of its holder.
2. Slide the replacement battery into position, positive side up.
3. The battery holder automatically secures the battery in the proper position.
4. Replace the computer access panel.
5. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
6. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
7–50 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.21.2 Type 2 B at ter y H older
1. To release the battery from its holder, squeeze the metal clamp that extends above one edge
of the battery. When the battery pops up, lift it out 1.
2. To insert the new battery, slide one edge of the replacement battery under the holder’s lip
with the positive side up 2. Push the other edge down until the clamp snaps over the other
edge of the battery.
3. Replace the computer access panel.
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 7–51
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
7.21.3 Type 3 B at te r y H o lder
1. Pull back on the clip 1 that holds the battery in place, then remove the battery 2.
2. Insert the new battery and position the clip back in place.
3. Replace the computer access panel.
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
7–52 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures— Small Form Factor (SFF) Chassis
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–1
8
Removal and Replacement Procedures -
Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
Adherence to the procedures and precautions described in this chapter is essential for proper
service. After completing all necessary removal and replacement procedures, run the diagnostics
utility to verify that all components operate properly.
✎Not all features listed in this guide are available on all computers.
8.1 Preparation for Disassembly
See Chapter 5, “Identifying the Chassis, Routine Care, and Disassembly Preparation” for initial
procedures.
1. Remove/disengage any security devices that prohibit opening the computer (Section 8.2,
“External Security Devices”).
2. Close any open software applications.
3. Exit the operating system.
4. Remove any diskette, compact disc, or MultiBay device from the computer.
5. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
ÄCAUTION: Turn off the computer before disconnecting any cables.
ÄCAUTION: Regardless of the power-on state, voltage is always present on the system board as long as
the system is plugged into an active AC outlet. In some systems the cooling fan is on even when the
computer is in the “Standby,” or “Suspend” modes. The power cord should always be disconnected
before servicing a unit.
6. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the computer.
7. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the computer.
✎During disassembly, label each cable as you remove it, noting its position and routing. Keep all
screws with the units removed.
ÄCAUTION: The screws used in the computer are of different thread sizes and lengths; using the wrong
screw in an application may damage the unit.
8–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8. If the PC is mounted in the accessory mounting stand, loosen the thumbscrew that secures
the computer to the stand 1.
9. Slide the computer forward until it is disengaged from the hooks on the front of the tower
stand, then lift the computer off the stand 2 and lay the computer down on its rubber feet.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–3
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.2 External Security Devices
8.2.1 Installing a Cable Lock
The cable lock may be used to secure the computer access panel to the chassis and, at the same
time, secure the computer to a fixed object.
8.2.2 Installing a Padlock
A padlock may be used by itself to secure the access panel to the computer chassis. A padlock
may also be used with a security cable to secure the computer to a fixed object.
8–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.3 Computer Access Panel
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
ÄCAUTION: Before removing the computer access panel, ensure that the computer is turned off and that
the power cord is disconnected from the electrical outlet.
2. Lay the computer down so the rubber feet rest on a solid surface.
3. Loosen the captive thumbscrew 1 that secures the access panel to the computer chassis.
4. Slide the top access panel back about 1.3 cm, (1/2 inch), then lift it off the unit 2.
To install the access panel, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–5
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.4 MultiBay Device
ÄCAUTION: The MultiBay device must be removed from the chassis before the front panel assembly is
removed. Failure to remove the MultiBay device will result in severe damage to the computer.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Unlock the MultiBay device by rotating the green locking lever on top of the MultiBay drive
cage to the unlocked position.
4. Replace the access panel.
5. Eject the MultiBay device by sliding the front-mounted eject lever to the left 1, then pull the
device out of the device bay 2.
To install the MultiBay device, reverse the removal procedures. Lock the device in place if
desired.
8–6 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.5 MultiBay Riser Card
ÄCAUTION: The MultiBay riser card must be removed before removing the front panel assembly. Failure
to do so will damage the MultiBay riser card and the front panel assembly.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove any MultiBay device in the drive cage (Section 8.4).
4. Grasp the green handle on top of the riser card assembly and lift it straight up.
✎The MultiBay riser card assembly serves a number of purposes: it provides data and power to an
installed MultiBay device; it locks the front panel assembly in the chassis; and it secures the
power supply in the chassis and prevents its front-to-back movement.
To reinstall the riser card, reverse the removal procedures.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–7
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.6 Front Panel Assembly
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove any MultiBay device from the drive cage (Section 8.4).
4. Remove the MultiBay riser card (Section 8.5).
5. Lift up on the two green locking levers on the left and right sides of the chassis 1. This will
unlatch the front panel assembly and push it about 1.3 cm (1/2 inch) out of the chassis.
6. Disconnect the fan and speaker cables from the system board and remove the panel
assembly 2 by pulling it straight out of the chassis.
To reinstall the front panel assembly, reverse the removal procedure.
8–8 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.7 Front Bezel
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove any MultiBay device in the drive cage (Section 8.4).
4. Remove the MultiBay riser card (Section 8.5).
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.6).
6. Use a #0 Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws that secure the front bezel to the
front panel assembly 1.
7. Release the catch 2 that keeps the top of the bezel in place. It may also be necessary to
release the catch that secures the bottom of the bezel in place.
8. Pull the front bezel away from the assembly 3.
To reinstall the front bezel, reverse the removal procedures.
✎When installing the front bezel, make sure that the MultiBay eject lever is positioned nearest the
center of the bezel to ensure it will properly activate the eject mechanism.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–9
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.8 Chassis Fan
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove any MultiBay device in the drive cage (Section 8.4).
4. Remove the MultiBay riser card (Section 8.5).
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.6).
6. Remove the four screws that secure the chassis fan to the housing 1.
7. Remove the fan 2.
To install the fan assembly, reverse the removal procedures, making sure that the fan cable is
located near the top of the assembly nearest the center of the front panel assembly.
8–10 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.9 Cable Management
Always follow good cable management practices when working inside the computer.
■Keep cables away from major heat sources like the heatsink.
■Do not jam cables on top of expansion cards or memory modules. Printed circuit cards like
these are not designed to take excessive pressure on them.
■Keep cables clear of sliding or moveable parts to prevent their being cut or crimped when the
parts are moved.
■Do not bend any cable sharply. A sharp bend can break the internal wires.
■Never bend a SATA data cable tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius.
■Never crease a SATA data cable.
■Do not rely on components like the drive cage, power supply, or computer cover to push
cables down into the chassis. Always position the cables to lay properly by themselves.
When removing the power supply power cables from the P1 or P3 connectors on the system
board, always follow these steps:
1. Squeeze on the top of the retaining latch attached to the cable end of the connector 1.
2. Grasp the cable end of the connector and pull it straight up 2.
ÄCAUTION: Always pull the connector - NEVER pull on the cable. Pulling on the cable could damage the
cable and result in a failed power supply.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–11
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.10 Memory
ÄCAUTION: The memory module sockets have gold metal contacts. When upgrading the memory, it is
important to use memory modules with gold metal contacts to prevent corrosion and/or oxidation
resulting from having incompatible metals in contact with each other.
ÄCAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional cards.
Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by briefly touching
a grounded metal object. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more information.
ÄCAUTION: When handling a memory module, be careful not to touch any of the contacts. Doing so
may damage the module.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
ÅWARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to
cool before touching.
✎You many need to remove the expansion card cage if it has a full-height card installed.
3. Open both latches of the memory module socket 1, and insert the memory module into the
socket 2. If you are replacing a memory module, place it in the socket vacated by its
predecessor. Push the module down into the socket, ensuring that the module is fully inserted
and properly seated. Make sure the latches are in the closed position 3.
✎A memory module can be installed in only one way. Match the notch on the module with the tab
on the memory socket.
4. Repeat step 3 for any additional modules that you want to install.
8–12 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
✎The computer automatically recognizes the additional memory when the computer is turned on.
To reassemble the computer, reverse the removal procedure.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–13
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.11 Expansion Card Cage
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Rotate the bail handle on the expansion card cage 1 and lift the cage straight up 2.
To install the cage, align the cage in the guides on the chassis and press it firmly into place.
8–14 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.12 Expansion Card
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the expansion card cage (Section 8.11).
4. Open the latch 1 by squeezing the retainer fingers together and rotate the latch out of the
way 2.
5. Lay the card cage on its edge and hold it firmly in place. Grasp the card and carefully rock it
back and forth until the connectors pull free from the card cage. Pull the expansion card
straight out 3 to remove it from the cage. Be sure not to scrape the card against the cage.
Store the removed card in anti-static packaging.
6. If you are not installing a new expansion card, install an expansion slot cover to close the
open slot and continue with step 8.
If you are installing a new expansion card, continue with step 7.
ÄCAUTION: After removing an expansion card, you must replace it with a new card or expansion slot
cover for proper cooling of internal components during operation.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–15
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
7. Slide the bracket on the end of the expansion card down into the slot and press the card
firmly into the socket.
✎When you install an expansion card, make sure you press firmly on the card so that the whole
connector seats properly in the expansion card socket on the riser board.
8. Close the latch firmly to secure the card in place.
9. Install the expansion card cage into the computer.
10. Reconfigure the computer, if necessary. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide on
the Documentation and Diagnostics CD for instructions about using Computer Setup.
8–16 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.13 Expansion Card Retaining Latch
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the expansion card cage (Section 8.11).
4. Open the latch 1 by squeezing the retainer fingers together, then rotate the latch out of the
way 2.
5. Use a thin, flat-blade screwdriver to pry 3 the damaged locking lever off the expansion card
cage.
6. Remove the locking lever.
To install the replacement locking lever, spread the pivot pin area and push it onto the ear of the
expansion card cage so the pins snap into their receptacles.
Complete the assembly by locking the expansion card in place and reinstalling the expansion
card cage.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–17
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.14 Hood Sensor
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove the expansion card cage (Section 8.11).
4. Disconnect the cable from the system board 1 and then slide the hood sensor out of the slot
in the chassis 2.
To install the hood sensor, reverse the removal procedures.
8–18 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.15 Hard Drive
A Torx T-15 screwdriver is needed to remove and install the guide screws on a hard drive.
ÄCAUTION: Make sure personal files on the hard drive are backed up to an external storage device
before removing the hard drive. Failure to do so will result in data loss. After replacing the primary hard
drive, you will need to run the Restore Plus! CD to load the HP factory-installed files.
ÄCAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the computer or drive:
■If you are inserting or removing a hard drive, shut down the operating system properly, then turn off
the computer. Do not remove a hard drive while the computer is on or in standby mode.
■Before handling a drive, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive,
avoid touching the connector. Refer to Section 5.2, “Electrostatic Discharge Information” for more
information about preventing electrostatic damage.
■Handle a drive carefully; do not drop it.
■Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive.
■Avoid exposing a hard drive to liquids, temperature extremes, or products that have magnetic fields
such as monitors or speakers.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
ÅWARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury from hot surfaces, allow the internal system components to
cool before touching.
3. Remove any MultiBay device in the drive cage (Section 8.4).
4. Remove the MultiBay riser card (Section 8.5).
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.6).
6. Disconnect the power and data cables from the hard drive.
Follow proper cable management techniques when handling all cables (Section 8.9).
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–19
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
7. Pull the drive release lever away from the hard drive 1, then lift the cable-end of the drive
up 2 and pull it towards the center of the chassis 3 to remove it from the drive cage.
8. Remove the four guide screws (two on each side) from the old drive. You will need these
screws to install a new drive.
9. Store the removed drive in anti-static packaging.
To install a drive, reverse the removal procedure.
8–20 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.16 Front I/O Device
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove any MultiBay device in the drive cage (Section 8.4).
4. Remove the MultiBay riser card (Section 8.5).
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.6).
6. Remove the hard drive (Section 8.15).
7. Remove the two screws that hold the front I/O device in place 1.
8. Disconnect the audio cable from the back of the IO device 2 and pull that cable through the
tunnel opening in the chassis 3.
9. Disconnect the I/O cables from the system board.
To install the front I/O device, follow this sequence:
1. Thread the audio cable through the tunnel in the chassis and attach it to the front I/O board.
2. Attach the front USB cable and the power switch/LED cable to the front I/O board.
3. Attach the front I/O board to the chassis with two screws.
4. Plug the cables into the system board.
✎All cables are color coded to match their connectors on the front I/O board and are keyed to
prevent improper connections.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–21
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.17 Heatsink Assembly
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove any MultiBay device in the drive cage (Section 8.4).
4. Remove the MultiBay riser card (Section 8.5).
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.6).
6. Disconnect the thermal sensor and heatsink fan cables 1 from the system board.
7. Unscrew the four screws that secure the heatsink to the system board 2, then lift the heatsink
from the system board 3.
ÄCAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be removed in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
even the downward forces on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
8. Lay the heatsink on its top in a safe area to prevent the thermal grease from contaminating
the work surface.
8–22 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.18 Processor
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove any MultiBay device in the drive cage (Section 8.4).
4. Remove the MultiBay riser card (Section 8.5).
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.6).
6. Remove the heatsink (Section 8.17).
7. Rotate the processor locking lever to its full open position 1.
8. Raise and rotate the microprocessor retainer to its fully open position 2.
9. Carefully lift the processor from the socket 3.
ÄCAUTION: Do NOT handle the pins in the processor socket. These pins are very fragile and handling
them could cause irreparable damage. Once pins are damaged it may be necessary to replace the
system board.
ÄCAUTION: The heatsink must be installed within 24 hours of installing the processor to prevent damage
to the processor’s solder connections.
To install a new processor:
1. Place the processor in its socket and close the retainer.
2. Secure the locking lever.
If reusing the existing heatsink, go to step 3.
If using a new heatsink, go to step 5.
3. If reusing the existing heatsink, clean bottom of the heatsink and apply the thermal grease
provided in the spares kit to the top of the processor.
4. Clean the bottom of the heatsink with the provided alcohol pad and place it atop the
processor. Go to step 6.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–23
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
5. If using a new heatsink, remove the protective covering from the bottom of the heatsink and
place it in position atop the processor.
6. Secure the heatsink to the system board and system board tray with the 4 captive screws and
attach the heatsink control cable to the system board.
ÄCAUTION: Heatsink retaining screws should be tightened in diagonally opposite pairs (as in an X) to
evenly seat the heatsink on the processor. This is especially important as the pins on the socket are very
fragile and any damage to them may require replacing the system board.
✎After installing a new processor onto the system board, always update the system ROM to ensure
that the latest version of the BIOS is being used on the computer. The latest system BIOS can be
found on the Web at: http:\\h18000.www1.hp.com/support/files.
8–24 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.19 Power Supply
ÅWARNING: Voltage is always present on the system board when the computer is plugged into an
active AC outlet. To avoid possible personal injury and damage to the equipment, the power cord should
be disconnected from the computer and/or the AC outlet before opening the computer.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove any MultiBay device in the drive cage (Section 8.4).
4. Remove the MultiBay riser card (Section 8.5).
5. Disconnect the power supply cable from the hard drive and the 6-pin power supply cable on
the system board alongside the heatsink.
6. Slide the power supply towards the front of the chassis 1 about 1.3 cm (1/2 inch) then slide
it towards the center of the chassis and rotate it up 2 to access the main cable connection
beneath it.
7. Disconnect the power cable from the system board 3.
✎There are slots on the chassis that match with clips on the bottom of the power supply for positive
retention.
8. Remove the power supply from the chassis.
To install the power supply, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the power supply engages
the clips on the chassis when sliding it into place.
✎When installing the power supply make sure the cables are routed properly and do not interfere
with the access panel installation.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–25
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.20 Battery
The battery that comes with this computer provides power to the real-time clock and has a
lifetime of about three years. When replacing the battery, use a battery equivalent to the battery
originally installed on the computer. The computer comes with a 3-volt lithium coin cell battery.
✎The lifetime of the lithium battery can be extended by plugging the computer into a live AC wall
socket. The lithium battery is only used when the computer is NOT connected to AC power.
ÅWARNING: This computer contains an internal lithium manganese dioxide battery. There is a risk of fire and
burns if the battery is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:
■Do not attempt to recharge the battery.
■Do not expose to temperatures higher than 140°F (60°C).
■Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or
water.
■Replace the battery only with the HP spare designated for this product.
ÄCAUTION: Before replacing the battery, it is important to back up the computer CMOS settings. When
the battery is removed or replaced, the CMOS settings will be cleared. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10)
Utility Guide for information on backing up the CMOS settings.
NBatteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general
household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public
collection system or return them to HP, their authorized partners, or their agents.
ÄCAUTION: Static electricity can damage the electronic components of the computer or optional
equipment. Before beginning these procedures, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by
briefly touching a grounded metal object.
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove any MultiBay device in the drive cage (Section 8.4).
4. Remove the MultiBay riser card (Section 8.5).
5. Remove the power supply to access the battery (Section 8.19).
6. Depending on the type of battery holder on the system board, complete the following
instructions to replace the battery:
8–26 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.20.1 Type 1 Battery Holder
1. Lift the battery out of its holder.
2. Slide the replacement battery into position, positive side up.
3. The battery holder automatically secures the battery in the proper position.
4. After the battery has been replaced, reverse the disassembly procedure.
5. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
6. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–27
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.20.2 Type 2 Battery Holder
1. To release the battery from its holder, squeeze the metal clamp 1 that extends above one
edge of the battery. When the battery pops up, lift it out.
2. To insert the new battery, slide one edge of the replacement battery under the holder’s lip
with the positive side up 2. Push the other edge down until the clamp snaps over the other
edge of the battery.
3. After the battery has been replaced, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
8–28 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.20.3 Type 3 Battery Holder
1. Pull back on the clip 1 that holds the battery in place, then remove the battery 2.
2. Insert the new battery and position the clip back in place.
3. After the battery has been replaced, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4. Plug in the computer and turn on power to the computer.
5. Reset the date and time, your passwords, and any special system setups, using Computer
Setup. Refer to the Computer Setup (F10) Utility Guide.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 8–29
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.21 Speaker
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Disconnect the speaker cable from the system board.
4. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.6).
5. Remove the two screws 1 that secure the speaker to the front panel then remove the
speaker 2.
To install the speaker, reverse the removal procedure.
8–30 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Removal and Replacement Procedures - Ultra-Slim Desktop (USDT) Chassis
8.22 System Board
1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (Section 8.1).
2. Remove the computer access panel (Section 8.3).
3. Remove any MultiBay device in the drive cage (Section 8.4).
4. Remove the MultiBay riser card (Section 8.5).
5. Remove the front panel assembly (Section 8.6).
6. Remove the memory modules (Section 8.10).
7. Remove the heatsink (Section 8.17).
8. Remove the power supply (Section 8.19).
9. Disconnect all cables connected to the system board, noting their location for reinstallation.
10. Remove the thumbscrew that secures the system board to the chassis 1.
11. Slide the system board towards the front of the chassis 2, making sure that all keyhole
retainers are clear before lifting the system board from the chassis.
ÄCAUTION: Be very careful when removing or replacing the system board to prevent damaging it.
To install the system board, reverse the removal procedure.
✎When installing the system board make sure that the board is pressed firmly against the floor of
the chassis to allow the keys to lock into the keyhole slots on the system board.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 A–1
A
Connector Pin Assignments
This appendix contains the pin assignments for many computer and workstation connectors.
Some of these connectors may not be used on the product being serviced.
Keyboard
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1
2
3
Data
Unused
Ground
4
5
6
+5 VDC
Clock
Unused
Mouse
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1
2
3
Data
Unused
Ground
4
5
6
+5 VDC
Clock
Unused
Ethernet BNC
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1 (Center) Data
2 (Shield) Ground
A–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Connector Pin Assignments
Ethernet RJ-45
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
(+) Transmit Data
(-) Transmit Data
(+) Receive Data
Unused
5
6
7
8
Unused
(-) Receive Data
Unused
Unused
Ethernet AUI
Connector and Icon
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
Ground
Negative AUI Differential Collision
Positive AUI Differential Collision
Negative AUI Differential Transmit
9
10
11
12
Positive AUI Differential Receive
+12V
Ground
Ground
5
6
7
8
Positive AUI Differential Transmit
Ground
Ground
Negative AUI Differential Receive
13
14
15
16
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 A–3
Connector Pin Assignments
Parallel Interface
Connector and Icon
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
2
3
Strobe
Data Bit 0
Data Bit 1
7
8
9
Data Bit 5
Data Bit 6
Data Bit 7
13
14
15
Select
Auto Linefeed
Error
4
5
6
Data Bit 2
Data Bit 3
Data Bit 4
10
11
12
Acknowledge
Busy
Paper End
16
17
18-25
Initialize Printer
Select IN
Signal Ground
Serial Interface, Powered and Non-Powered
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1
2
3
Carrier Detect (12V if powered)
Receive Data
Transmit Data
4
5
6
Data Terminal Ready
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
7
8
9
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Ring Indicator (5V if powered)
USB
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
+5 VDC
- Data
+ Data
Ground
Microphone
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone) Pin Signal
1 (Tip) Audio
2 (Ring) Power
3 (Shield) Ground
123
123
A–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Connector Pin Assignments
Headphone
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone) Pin Signal
1 (Tip) Audio_Left
2 (Ring) Audio_Right
3 (Shield) Ground
Line-In Audio
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone) Pin Signal
1 (Tip) Audio_In_Left
2 (Ring) Audio_In_Right
3 (Shield) Ground
Line-Out Audio
Connector and Icon (1/8” miniphone) Pin Signal
1 (Tip) Audio_Out_Left
2 (Ring) Audio_Out_Right
3 (Shield) Ground
SCSI Low Voltage Differential/Single Ended (LVD/SE)
Connector and Icon
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1-16
17-18
19
Ground
TERMPWR
Reserved
40
41
42
-D0
-D1
-D1
49-50
51-52
53
Ground
TERMPW
Reserved
60
61
62
-MSG
-SEL
-C/D
20-34
35
36
Ground
-D12
-D13
43
44
45
-D3
-D4
-D5
54
55
56
Ground
-ATN
Ground
63
64
65
-REQ
-I/O
-D
37
38
39
-D14
-D15
-DP1
46
47
48
-D6
-D7
-DP0
57
58
59
-BSY
-ACK
-RST
66
67
68
-D
-D
-D
123
123
123
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 A–5
Connector Pin Assignments
Ultra SCSI
Connector and Icon
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1-11
12
13
14
Ground
Reserved
Open
Reserved
29
30
31
32
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
37
38
39
40
Reserved
TERMPWR
Reserved
Ground
45
46
47
48
RST #
MSG #
SEL #
C/D
15-25
26
27
28
Ground
DB0
DB1
DB2
33
34
35
36
DB7
DBP
Ground
Ground
41
42
43
44
ATN #
Ground
BSY #
ACK #
49
50
REQ #
Input/Output
External Infrared Transceiver
Connector and Icon
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
2
3
Transmit
Receive
Ground
4
5
6
5V
Mode
Not Used
7
8
Not Used
Not Used
Monitor
Connector and Icon
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
2
3
Red Analog
Green Analog
Blue Analog
6
7
8
Ground
Ground
Ground
11
12
13
Not used
DDC Serial Data
Horizontal Sync
4
5
Not used
Ground
9
10
+5V (fused)
Ground
14
15
Vertical Sync
DDC Serial Clock
A–6 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Connector Pin Assignments
ATA/ATAPI (IDE) Standard Drive Cable
Connector
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
Reset
Ground
DD7
DD8
DD6
15
16
17
18
19
DD1
DD14
DD0
DD15
Ground
29
30
31
32
33
DMAK
Ground
INTRQ
IOCS16
DA1
6
7
8
9
10
DD9
DD5
DD10
DD4
DD11
20
21
22
23
24
(Key)
DMARQ
Ground
DIOW
Ground
34
35
36
37
38
PDIAG (cable detect)
DA0
DA2
CS1FX
CS3FX
11
12
13
14
DD3
DD12
DD2
DD13
25
26
27
28
DIOR
Ground
IORDY
CSEL
39
40
DASP
Ground
MultiBay CD-ROM Adapter
Connector
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
RESDRV_
GROUND
D07
D08
D06
18
19
20
21
22
D15
GROUND
(key)
DRQ
GROUND
35
36
37
38
39
A0
A2
CS1FX
CS3FX
DASP
52
53
54
55
56
FP05
FP06
FP07
FP08
FP09
6
7
8
9
10
D09
D05
D10
D04
D11
23
24
25
26
27
IOW
GROUND
IOR
GROUND
IOCHDRY
40
41
42
43
44
GROUND
+5VMLOG
-5VMOT
GROUND
AUDIO_L
57
58
59
60
61
FP10
FP11
FP12
FP13
FP14
11
12
13
14
15
D03
D12
D02
D13
D01
28
29
30
31
32
CABLE SELECT
DAK
GROUND
IRQ
IO16
45
46
47
48
49
A_GROUND_R
A_GROUND_I
audio_r
FP01
FP02
62
63
64
65
66
FP15
FP16
FP17
FP18
FP19
16
17
D14
D00
33
34
A1
PDIAG
50
51
FP03
FP04
67
68
FP20
FP21
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 A–7
Connector Pin Assignments
24-Pin Power
Connector
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
GND
+5 V
GND
+5 V
7
8
9
10
11
12
GND
POK
+5 Vaux
+12 V
+12 V
+3.3 V
13
14
15
16
17
18
+3.3 V
-12 V
GND
PSON
GND
GND
19
20
21
22
23
24
GND
open
+5 V
+5 V
+5 V
GND
24
12
13
1
24-Pin MicroFit Power
Connector
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
+5 Vaux
GND
+5 V
+5 V
PS_ON
GND
7
8
9
10
11
12
PWRGD
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
Tach
GND
Fan-CMD
13
14
15
16
17
18
+12 V
+5 V Sense
GND
+5 V
+5 V
+3.3 V
19
20
21
22
23
24
GND
+3.3 Sense
+3.3 V
+3.3 V
GND
-12 V
4-Pin Power (for CPU)
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1GND
2GND
3+12 V CPU
4-12 V CPU
24
12
13
1
A–8 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Connector Pin Assignments
6-Pin Power (for CPU)
Connector and Icon Pin Signal
1GND
2GND
3GND
412 V CPU
512 V CPU
6+12 V
6
4
SATA Data and Power
Drive Connector
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
S1
S5
Ground
B-
S2
S6
A+
B+
S3
S7
A-
Ground
S4 Ground
P1
P5
P9
P13
V 3.3
Ground
V 5
V 12
P2
P6
P10
P14
V 3.3
Ground
Ground
V 12
P3
P7
P11
P15
V 3.3
V 5
Reserved
V 12
P4
P8
P12
Ground
V 5
Ground
*S = Data, P = Power
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 A–9
Connector Pin Assignments
PCI Express
x1, x4, x8, and x16 PCI Express Connector
Pin A
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
PRSNT1#
+12V
+12V
GND
JTAG2
6
7
8
9
10
JTAG3
JTAG4
JTAG5
+3.3v
+3.3v
11
12
13
14
15
PERST#
GND
REFCLK+
REFCLK-
GND
16
17
18
19
20
PERp0
PERn0
GND
RSVD
GND
21
22
23
24
25
PERp1
PERn1
GND
GND
PERp2
26
27
28
29
30
PERn(2)
GND
GND
PERp3
PERn3
31
32
33
34
35
GND
RSVD
RSVD
GND
PERp4
36
37
38
39
40
PERn4
GND
GND
PERp5
PERn5
41
42
43
44
45
GND
GND
PERp6
PERn6
GND
46
47
48
49
50
GND
PERp7
PERn7
GND
RSVD
51
52
53
54
55
GND
PERp8
PERn8
GND
GND
56
57
58
59
60
PERp9
PERn9
GND
GND
PERp10
61
62
63
64
65
PERn10
GND
GND
PERp11
PERn11
66
67
68
69
70
GND
GND
PERp12
PERn12
GND
71
72
73
74
75
GND
PERp13
PERn13
GND
GND
76
77
78
79
80
PERp14
PERn14
GND
GND
PERp15
81
82
PERn15
GND
Pin B information is on the next page
Notes:
x1 PCI Express uses pins 1-18
x4 PCI Express uses pins 1-32
x8 PCI Express uses pins 1-49
x16 PCI Express uses pins 1-82
A–10 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Connector Pin Assignments
Pin B
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
+12V
+12V
RSVD
GND
SMCLK
6
7
8
9
10
SMDAT
GND
+3.3v
JTAG1
3.3vAux
11
12
13
14
15
WAKE#
RSVD
GND
PETp0
PETn0
16
17
18
19
20
GND
PRSNT2#
GND
PETp1
PETn1
21
22
23
24
25
GND
GND
PETp2
PETn2
GND
26
27
28
29
30
GND
PETp3
PETn3
GND
RSVD
31
32
33
34
35
PRSNT2#
GND
PETp4
PETn4
GND
36
37
38
39
40
GND
PETp5
PETn5
GND
GND
41
42
43
44
45
PETp6
PRTn6
GND
GND
PETp7
46
47
48
49
50
PETn7
GND
PRSNT2#
GND
PETp8
51
52
53
54
55
PETn8
GND
GND
PETp9
PETn9
56
57
58
59
60
GND
GND
PETp10
PETn10
GND
61
62
63
64
65
GND
PETp11
PETn11
GND
GND
66
67
68
69
70
PETp12
PETn12
GND
GND
PETp13
71
72
73
74
75
PETn13
GND
GND
PETp14
PETn14
76
77
78
79
80
GND
GND
PETp15
PETn15
GND
81
82
PRSNT2#
RSVD
Notes:
x1 PCI Express uses pins 1-18
x4 PCI Express uses pins 1-32
x8 PCI Express uses pins 1-49
x16 PCI Express uses pins 1-82
PCI Express
x1, x4, x8, and x16 PCI Express Connector
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 A–11
Connector Pin Assignments
DVI Connector
Connector and Icon
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
T.M.D.S. Data2-
T.M.D.S. Data2+
T.M.D.S. Data2/4 Shield
T.M.D.S. Data4-
13
14
15
16
T.M.D.S. Data3+
+5V Power
Ground (for +5V)
Hot Plug Detect
5
6
7
8
T.M.D.S. Data4+
DDC Clock
DDC Data
No Connect
17
18
19
20
T.M.D.S. Data0-
T.M.D.S. Data0+
T.M.D.S. Data0/5 Shield
T.M.D.S. Data5-
9
10
11
12
T.M.D.S. Data1-
T.M.D.S. Data1+
T.M.D.S. Data1/3 Shield
T.M.D.S. Data3-
21
22
23
24
T.M.D.S. Data5+
T.M.D.S. Data Shield
T.M.D.S. Clock+
T.M.D.S. Clock-
A–12 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Connector Pin Assignments
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 B–1
B
Power Cord Set Requirements
The power supplies on some computers have external power switches. The voltage select switch
feature on the computer permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-120 or 220-240
volts AC. Power supplies on those computers that do not have external power switches are
equipped with internal switches that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the
proper voltage.
The power cord set received with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country
where you purchased the equipment.
Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you
use the computer.
General Requirements
The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:
1. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for
evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed.
2. The power cord set must have a minimum current capacity of 10A (7A Japan only) and a
nominal voltage rating of 125 or 250 volts AC, as required by each country’s power system.
3. The diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG, and the length of the
cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet).
The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items
placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and
the point where the cord exits from the product.
ÅWARNING: Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is
damaged in any manner, replace it immediately.
Japanese Power Cord Requirements
For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product.
ÄCAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products.
B–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Power Cord Set Requirements
Country-Specific Requirements
Additional requirements specific to a country are shown in parentheses and explained below.
Country
Accrediting
Agency Country
Accrediting
Agency
Australia (1)
Austria (1)
Belgium (1)
Canada (2)
EANSW
OVE
CEBC
CSA
Italy (1)
Japan (3)
Norway (1)
Sweden (1)
IMQ
METI
NEMKO
SEMKO
Denmark (1)
Finland (1)
France (1)
Germany (1)
DEMKO
SETI
UTE
VDE
Switzerland (1)
United Kingdom (1)
United States (2)
SEV
BSI
UL
1. The flexible cord must be <HAR> Type HO5VV-F, 3-conductor, 0.75mm2 conductor size.
Power cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall plug) must bear the certification mark of
the agency responsible for evaluation in the country where it will be used.
2. The flexible cord must be Type SVT or equivalent, No. 18 AWG, 3-conductor. The wall plug
must be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15A, 125V) or NEMA 6-15P
(15A, 250V) configuration.
3. Appliance coupler, flexible cord, and wall plug must bear a "T" mark and registration
number in accordance with the Japanese Dentori Law. Flexible cord must be Type VCT or
VCTF, 3-conductor, 0.75 mm2 conductor size. Wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type
with a Japanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7A, 125V) configuration.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 C–1
C
POST Error Messages
POST Error Messages
An error message results if the Power-On Self-Test (POST) encounters a problem. This test runs
when the system is turned on, checking assemblies within the computer and reporting any errors
found.
Not all computers use all of the codes listed.
POST Error Messages
Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
101-Option ROM
Checksum Error
System ROM or
expansion board option
ROM checksum.
Verify the correct ROM.
Flash the ROM if needed.
If an expansion card was recently
added, remove it and see if the problem
remains.
Clear CMOS.
If the message disappears, there may be
a problem with the expansion card.
Replace the system board.
103-System Board
Failure
DMA or timers. Clear CMOS.
Remove expansion boards.
Replace the system board.
110-Out of Memory
Space for Option
ROMs
Recently added PCI
expansion card contains
an option ROM too large
to download during
POST.
If a PCI expansion card was recently
added, remove it to see if the problem
remains.
In Computer Setup, disable the NIC PXE
Option ROM Download to prevent PXE
option ROM for the internal NIC from
being downloaded during POST to free
more memory for an expansion card’s
option ROM. Internal PXE option ROM is
used for booting from the NIC to a PXE
server.
Ensure that the ACPI/USB Buffers @ Top
of Memory setting in Computer Setup is
enabled.
C–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
POST Error Messages
162-System Options
Not Set
Configuration incorrect.
RTC (real-time clock)
battery may need to be
replaced.
Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup) and
check configuration of Onboard
Devices.
Set the date and time under Control
Panel or in F10 Setup depending on
the operating system.
If the problem persists, replace the RTC
battery.
163-Time & Date Not
Set
Invalid time or date in
configuration memory.
RTC (real-time clock)
battery may need to be
replaced.
Set the date and time under Control
Panel or in F10 Setup depending on
the operating system.
If the problem persists, replace the RTC
battery.
CMOS jumper may not
be properly installed.
Check for proper placement of the
CMOS jumper, if applicable.
164-Memory Size Error Memory amount has
changed since the last
boot (memory added or
removed).
Press the F1 key to save the memory
changes.
Memory configuration is
incorrect.
Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup).
Make sure memory module(s) (if any) are
installed properly.
If third party memory has been added,
test using HP-only memory.
Verify proper memory module type.
201-Memory Error RAM failure. Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup) or
Windows utilities.
Ensure memory and continuity modules
are installed correctly.
Verify proper memory module type.
Remove and replace the identified faulty
memory module(s).
If the error persists after replacing
memory modules, replace the system
board.
202-Memory Type
Mismatch
Memory modules do not
match each other.
Replace memory modules with matched
sets.
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 C–3
POST Error Messages
207-ECC Corrected
Single Bit Errors in
DIMM slot(s)
Memory module is
experiencing correctable
errors.
If additional memory was recently
added, remove it to see if the problem
remains.
If memory module was not recently
installed and frequency of error message
increases, consider replacing the
module.
Check product documentation for
memory support information.
213-Incompatible
memory Module in
memory Socket(s)
X,X, X
A memory module in
memory socket identified
in the error message is
missing critical SPD
information, or is
incompatible with the
chipset.
Verify proper memory module type.
Try another memory socket.
Replace memory with a module
conforming to the SPD standard.
214-DIMM
Configuration Warning
Populated DIMM
configuration is not
optimized.
Rearrange the DIMMS so that each
channel has the same amount of
memory.
216-Memory Size
Exceeds Maximum
Supported
Recently added memory
module(s) exceeds the
supported memory
amount for the system.
If additional memory was recently
added, remove it to see if the problem
remains.
Check product documentation for
memory support information.
219-ECC Memory
Module Detected. ECC
Modules not supported
on this platform
Recently added memory
module(s) support ECC
memory error correction.
If additional memory was recently
added, remove it to see if the problem
remains.
Check product documentation for
memory support information.
301-Keyboard Error Keyboard failure. Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
Check connector for bent or missing
pins.
Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
Replace keyboard.
303-Keyboard
Controller Error
I/O board keyboard
controller.
Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
Replace the system board.
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
C–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
POST Error Messages
304-Keyboard or
System Unit Error
Keyboard failure. Reconnect the keyboard with computer
turned off.
Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
Replace keyboard.
Replace system board.
404-Parallel Port
Address Conflict
Detected
Both external and internal
ports are assigned to
parallel port X.
Remove any parallel port expansion
cards.
Clear CMOS.
Reconfigure card resources and/or run
Computer Setup.
410-Audio Interrupt
Conflict
IRQ address conflicts with
another device.
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
411-Network Interface
Card Interrupt Conflict
IRQ address conflicts with
another device.
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
501-Display Adapter
Failure
Graphics display
controller.
Reseat the graphics card (if applicable).
Clear CMOS.
Verify that the monitor is attached and
turned on.
Replace the graphics card (if
applicable).
510-Splash Screen
image corrupted
Splash Screen image has
errors.
Reflash the system ROM with the latest
BIOS image
511-CPU, CPUA, or
CPUB Fan not detected
Fan is not connected or
may have malfunctioned.
Reseat fan cable.
Reseat the fan.
Replace the fan.
512-Chassis, rear
chassis, or front chassis
fan not detected
Fan is not connected,
may have malfunctioned.
Reseat chassis, rear chassis, or front
chassis fan cable.
Reseat chassis, rear chassis, or front
chassis fan.
Replace chassis, rear chassis, or front
chassis fan.
514-CPU or Chassis
Fan not detected.
CPU or chassis fan is not
connected or may have
malfunctioned.
Reseat CPU or chassis fan.
Reseat fan cable.
Replace CPU or chassis fan.
601-Diskette Controller
Error
Diskette controller
circuitry or floppy drive
circuitry incorrect.
Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup).
Check and/or replace cables.
Clear CMOS.
Replace diskette drive.
Replace the system board.
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 C–5
POST Error Messages
605-Diskette Drive Type
Error
Mismatch in drive type. Run Computer Setup (F10 Setup).
Disconnect any other diskette controller
devices (tape drives).
Clear CMOS.
610-External Storage
Device Failure
External tape drive not
connected.
Reinstall tape drive or press F1 and
allow system to reconfigure without the
drive.
611-Primary Floppy Port
Address Assignment
Conflict
Configuration error. Run Computer Setup and check the
configuration in Advanced >
Onboard Devices.
660-Display cache is
detected unreliable
Integrated graphics
controller display cache
is not working properly
and will be disabled.
Replace system board if minimal
graphics degrading is an issue.
912-Computer Cover
Has Been Removed
Since Last System Start
Up
Computer cover was
removed since the last
system startup.
No action required.
914-Hood Lock Coil is
NOT connected
Smart Cover Lock
mechanism is missing or
not connected.
Reconnect or replace hood locking
mechanism.
Reseat or replace hood locking
mechanism cable.
917-Front Audio not
Detected
Front audio harness has
been detached or
unseated from the system
board.
Reconnect or replace front audio
harness.
918-Front USB Not
Connected
Front USB harness has
been detached or
unseated from system
board.
Reconnect or replace front USB harness.
919-Front Panel,
MultiPort, and/or
MultiBay Risers not
Detected.
Riser card has been
removed or has not been
reinstalled properly in the
system.
Unplug computer and install/reinstall
riser cord.
921-Device in PCI
Express slot failed to
initialize.
There is an
incompatibility/problem
with this device and the
system or PCI Express Link
could not be retrained to
an x1.
Try rebooting the system. If the error
reoccurs, the device may not work with
this system.
1151-Serial Port A
Address Conflict
Detected
Both external and internal
serial ports are assigned
to COM1.
Remove any serial port expansion cards.
Clear CMOS.
Reconfigure card resources and/or run
Computer Setup or Windows utilities.
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
C–6 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
POST Error Messages
1152-Serial Port B
Address Conflict
Detected
Both external and internal
serial ports are assigned
to COM2.
Remove any serial port expansion cards.
Clear CMOS.
Reconfigure card resources and/or run
Computer Setup or Windows utilities.
1155-Serial Port
Address Conflict
Detected
Both external and internal
serial ports are assigned
to same IRQ.
Remove any serial port expansion cards.
Clear CMOS.
Reconfigure card resources and/or run
Computer Setup or Windows utilities.
1201-System Audio
Address Conflict
Detected
Device IRQ address
conflicts with another
device.
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
1202-MIDI Port Address
Conflict Detected
Device IRQ address
conflicts with another
device.
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
1203-Game Port
Address Conflict
Detected
Device IRQ address
conflicts with another
device.
Enter Computer Setup and reset the IRQ
in Advanced > Onboard Devices.
1720-SMART Hard
Drive Detect Imminent
Failure
Hard drive is about to
fail. (Some hard drives
have a firmware patch
that will fix an erroneous
error message.)
Determine if hard drive is giving correct
error message. Run the Drive Protection
System test if applicable.
Apply firmware patch if applicable. (visit
www.hp.com/support)
Back up contents and replace hard drive.
1785-MultiBay
incorrectly installed
(for integrated MultiBay/
USDT systems)
MultiBay device not
properly seated.
or
MultiBay riser not
properly seated.
Ensure the MultiBay device is fully
inserted.
Ensure the MultiBay riser is properly
seated.
1794-Inaccessible
devices attached to
SATA 1 and/or SATA 3
A device is attached to
SATA 1 and/or SATA 3.
Devices attached to these
connectors will be
inaccessible while “SATA
Emulation” is set to
“Combined IDE
Controller” in Computer
Setup.
If using Windows 2000 or Windows XP,
change “SATA Emulation” to “Separate
IDE Controller” in Computer Setup.
If not using Windows 2000 or Windows
XP, relocate the affected devices to SATA
0 or SATA 2 (if available).
Remove the affected devices from SATA
1 and SATA 3.
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 C–7
POST Error Messages
1796-SATA Cabling
Error
One or more SATA
devices are improperly
attached. For optimal
performance, the SATA 0
and SATA 1 connectors
must be used before
SATA 2 and SATA 3.
Ensure SATA connectors are used in
ascending order. For one device, use
SATA 0. For two devices, use SATA 0
and SATA 1. For three devices, use SATA
0, SATA1, and SATA 2.
1800-Temperature Alert Internal temperature
exceeds specification.
Check that computer air vents are not
blocked and the processor cooling fan is
running.
Verify processor speed selection.
Replace the processor.
Replace the system board.
1801-Microcode Patch
Error
Processor not supported
by ROM BIOS.
Upgrade BIOS to proper version.
Change the processor.
1802-Processor Not
Supported
Recently installed
processor may not be
supported by the system
board.
If processor was recently replaced,
restore the original processor to see if the
problem remains.
Check product documentation for
processor support information.
Invalid Electronic Serial
Number.
Electronic serial number
has become corrupted.
Run Computer Setup. If Setup already
has data in the field or will not allow the
serial number to be entered, download
from http://www.hp.com and run
SP5572.EXE (SNZERO.EXE).
Run Computer Setup and try to enter
serial number under Security, System ID,
then save changes.
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
C–8 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
POST Error Messages
Network Server Mode
Active and No
Keyboard Attached
Keyboard failure while
Network Server Mode
enabled.
Reconnect keyboard with computer
turned off.
Check connector for bent or missing
pins.
Ensure that none of the keys are
depressed.
Replace keyboard.
Parity Check 2 Parity RAM failure. Run Computer Setup and diagnostic
utilities.
System will not boot
without fan.
CPU fan not installed or
disconnected in VSFF
chassis.
Open hood, press the power button, and
see if the processor fan spins. If not
spinning, make sure the fan cable is
plugged into the system board. Ensure
the heatsink is properly seated.
If the heatsink is properly installed and
the fan connected but does not spin,
replace the heatsink-fan assembly.
POST Error Messages (Continued)
Screen Message Probable Cause Recommended Action
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 C–9
POST Error Messages
POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes
This section covers the front panel LED codes as well as the audible codes that may occur before
or during POST that do not necessarily have an error code or text message associated with them.
✎If you see flashing LEDs on a PS/2 keyboard, look for flashing LEDs on the front panel of the
computer and refer to the following table to determine the front panel LED codes.
✎Recommended actions in the following table are listed in the order in which they should be
performed.
✎Beeps will occur only for 5 iterations and then stop. LEDs will continue to blink until corrective
action is taken.
POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes
Activity Beeps Possible Cause Recommended Action
Green Power LED
On.
None Computer on. None
Green Power LED
flashes every two
seconds.
None Computer in
Suspend to RAM
mode (some
models only) or
normal Suspend
mode.
None required. Press any key or move the
mouse to wake the computer.
Red Power LED
flashes two times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause.
2 Processor thermal
protection
activated:
A fan may be
blocked or not
turning.
OR
The heatsink/fan
assembly is not
properly attached
to the processor.
Ensure that the computer air vents are not
blocked and the processor cooling fan is
running.
Open hood, press power button, and see
if the processor fan spins. If the processor
fan is not spinning, make sure the fan's
cable is plugged onto the system board
header. Ensure the fan is fully/properly
seated or installed.
If fan is plugged in and seated properly,
but is not spinning, then replace processor
fan.
Reseat processor heatsink and verify that
the fan assembly is properly attached.
Contact an authorized reseller or service
provider.
Red Power LED
flashes three times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause.
3 Processor not
installed (not an
indicator of bad
processor).
Check to see that the processor is present.
Reseat the processor.
C–10 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
POST Error Messages
Red Power LED
flashes four times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause.
4 Power failure
(power supply is
overloaded).
Open the hood and ensure the power
supply cable is seated into the connector
on the system board.
Check if a device is causing the problem
by removing ALL attached devices (such as
hard, diskette, or optical drives, and
expansion cards). Power on the system. If
the system enters the POST, then power off
and replace one device at a time and
repeat this procedure until failure occurs.
Replace the device that is causing the
failure. Continue adding devices one at a
time to ensure all devices are functioning
properly.
Replace the power supply.
Replace the system board.
Red Power LED
flashes five times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause.
5Pre-video memory
error.
Reseat DIMMs. Power on the system.
Replace DIMMs one at a time to isolate
the faulty module.
Replace third-party memory with HP
memory.
Replace the system board.
Red Power LED
flashes six times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause.
6Pre-video
graphics error.
For systems with a graphics card:
Reseat the graphics card. Power on the
system.
Replace the graphics card.
Replace the system board.
For systems with integrated graphics,
replace the system board.
Red Power LED
flashes seven
times, once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause.
7 System board
failure (ROM
detected failure
prior to video).
Replace the system board.
Red Power LED
flashes eight times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause.
8Invalid ROM
based on bad
checksum.
Reflash the ROM with the latest BIOS
image. See the “ROM Flash” section of the
Desktop Management Guide on the
Documentation and Diagnostics CD.
Replace the system board.
POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (Continued)
Activity Beeps Possible Cause Recommended Action
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 C–11
POST Error Messages
Red Power LED
flashes nine times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause.
9System powers on
but is unable to
boot.
Check that the voltage selector, located on
the rear of the power supply (some
models), is set to the appropriate voltage.
Proper voltage setting depends on your
region.
Replace the power supply.
Replace the processor.
Replace the system board.
Red Power LED
flashes ten times,
once every
second, followed
by a two second
pause.
10 Bad option card. Check each option card by removing the
card (one at a time if multiple cards), then
power on the system to see if fault goes
away.
Once a bad card is identified, remove and
replace the bad option card.
Replace the system board.
System does not
power on and
LEDs are not
flashing.
None System unable to
power on.
Press and hold the power button for less
than 4 seconds. If the hard drive LED turns
green, then check that the voltage selector,
located on the rear of the power supply, is
set to the appropriate voltage. Proper
voltage setting depends on your region.
Remove the expansion cards one at a time
until the LED light on the system board
turns on.
Replace the system board.
OR
Press and hold the power button for less
than 4 seconds. If the hard drive LED does
not turn on green then:
Check that the unit is plugged into a
working AC outlet.
Open hood and check that the power
button harness is properly connected to
the system board.
Check that both power supply cables are
properly connected to the system board.
Check to see if the LED light on the system
board is turned on. If it is turned on, then
replace the power button harness.
If the LED light on the system board is not
turned on, then replace the power supply.
Replace the system board.
POST Diagnostic Front Panel LEDs and Audible Codes (Continued)
Activity Beeps Possible Cause Recommended Action
C–12 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
POST Error Messages
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–1
D
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Preliminary Checklist
This section describes some simple, preliminary tests and guidelines for troubleshooting the
computer without using the diagnostics.
■Are the computer and monitor connected to a working electrical outlet?
■Is the voltage select switch is set to the appropriate voltage for your region (115V or 230V)?
■Is the computer turned on?
■Is the green power light illuminated?
■Is the monitor turned on?
■Is the green monitor light illuminated?
■Turn up the monitor brightness and contrast controls if the monitor is dim.
■If the system has multiple video sources (embedded, PCI, or PCI-Express adapters) installed
(embedded video on some models only) and a single monitor, the monitor must be plugged
into the monitor connector on the source selected as the primary VGA adapter. During boot,
the other monitor connectors are disabled and if the monitor is connected into these ports, the
monitor will not function. You can select which source will be the default VGA source in
Computer (F10) Setup.
■Press and hold any key. If the system beeps, then the keyboard is operating correctly.
■Check all cables for loose or incorrect connections.
■Reconfigure the computer after installing a non–Plug and Play expansion board or other
option, such as a diskette drive.
■Are all of the necessary device drivers installed?
■Have all printer drivers been installed for each application?
■Remove all bootable media (diskette, CD, or USB device) from the system before turning on
the system.
■Are all switches set correctly?
■Is the NIC Remote Wakeup cable (featured on some models) connected between the NIC and
the riser/system board?
D–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Minor Problems
Solving Minor Problems
Problem Cause Possible Solution
Computer appears
locked up and will not
turn off when the power
button is pressed.
Software control of the
power switch is not
functional.
1. Press and hold the power button
for at least four seconds until the
computer turns off.
2. Disconnect electrical plug from
outlet.
Computer will not
respond to USB
keyboard or mouse.
Computer is in
standby mode.
Press the power button to resume from
standby mode.
System has locked up. Restart computer.
ÄCAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby mode, do not hold down the power
button for more than four seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and you will lose
any unsaved data.
Computer date and
time display is incorrect.
RTC (real-time clock)
battery may need to be
replaced.
1. Reset the date and time under
Control Panel.
2. Replace the RTC battery.
Computer appears to
pause periodically.
Network driver is loaded
and no network
connection is established.
Establish a network connection, or
use Computer Setup or Microsoft
Windows Device Manager to disable
the network controller.
Cursor will not move
using the arrow keys on
the keypad.
The Num Lock key
may be on.
Press the Num Lock key. The Num
Lock key can be disabled (or
enabled) in Computer Setup.
Cannot remove
computer cover or
access panel.
Smart Cover Lock,
featured on some
computers, is locked.
1. Unlock the Smart Cover Lock
using Computer Setup.
2. Use the Smart Cover FailSafe Key
in case of forgotten password,
power loss, or computer
malfunction.
Poor performance is
experienced.
Processor is hot. 1. Ensure airflow to the computer is
not blocked.
2. Ensure the fans are connected
and working properly (some fans
only operate when needed).
3. Ensure the processor heatsink is
installed properly.
Hard drive is full. Transfer data from the hard drive to
create more space on the hard drive.
Low on memory. Add more memory.
Hard drive fragmented. Defragment hard drive.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–3
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Poor performance is
experienced.
(continued)
Program previously
accessed did not release
reserved memory back to
the system
Restart the computer.
Virus resident of the hard
drive.
Run virus protection program.
Too many applications
running.
1. Close unnecessary applications.
2. Add more memory.
Some software
applications, especially
games, are stressful on the
graphics subsystem.
1. Lower the display resolution for
the current application or consult
the documentation that came with
the application for suggestions on
how to improve performance by
adjusting parameters in the
application.
2. Add more memory.
3. Upgrade the graphics solution.
Cause unknown. Restart the computer.
Computer powered off
automatically and the
Power LED flashes Red
two times, once every
second, followed by a
two second pause, and
the computer beeps two
times. Beeps continue
for five iterations after
which the LED flashes
will continue until the
problem is resolved.
Processor thermal
protection activated:
A fan may be blocked or
not turning.
OR
The heatsink is not
properly attached to the
processor.
1. Ensure computer air vents are not
blocked and the cooling fan is
running.
2. Open hood, press power button,
and see if the processor fan
spins. If not spinning, make sure
the fan's cable is plugged onto
the system board header. Ensure
the fan is fully/properly seated or
installed.
3. Replace the processor
heatsink-fan assembly.
4. Reseat processor heatsink-fan
assembly and verify that the fan
is properly connected to the
system board.
Solving Minor Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Possible Solution
D–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
System does not power
on and the LEDs on the
front of the computer
are not flashing.
System unable to power
on.
Press and hold the power button for
less than 4 seconds. If the hard drive
LED turns green, then 5V Aux is
present and the power button is
working correctly.
1. Check that the voltage selector
(some models) is set to the
appropriate voltage.
2. Replace the system board.
OR
Press and hold the power button for
less than 4 seconds. The hard drive
LED does not turn on green.
1. Check that the unit is plugged
into a working AC outlet.
2. Open hood and check that the
power button harness is properly
connected to the system board.
3. Check that both power supply
cables are properly connected to
the system board.
4. If the 5 V_aux light on the system
board is on, then replace the
power button harness.
5. Replace the system board.
6. If the 5 V_aux light on the system
board is off then, remove the
expansion cards one at a time
until the 5 V_aux light on the
system board turns on.
7. If the 5 V_aux light on the system
board is off, then replace the
power supply.
Solving Minor Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Possible Solution
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–5
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Power Supply Problems
Solving Power Supply Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Power supply shuts down
intermittently.
Voltage selector switch
on rear of computer
chassis (some models) is
not switched to correct
line voltage.
Select the proper AC voltage.
Power supply fault. Replace the power supply.
Computer powered off
automatically and the
Power LED flashes Red two
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps two times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
problem is resolved.
Processor thermal
protection activated:
A fan may be blocked
or not turning.
OR
The heatsink/fan
assembly is not properly
attached to the
processor.
1. Ensure that the computer air
vents are not blocked and the
cooling fan is running.
2. Open hood, press the power
button, and see if the processor
fan spins. If the processor fan is
not spinning, make sure the
fan's cable is plugged onto the
system board header. Ensure
the fan is fully/properly seated
or installed.
3. If the fan is pugged in and
seated but not spinning, replace
the processor fan.
4. Reseat processor heatsink and
verify that the fan assembly is
properly attached.
Power LED flashes Red, four
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps four times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
problem is resolved.
Power failure (power
supply is overloaded).
1. Check that the voltage selector
(some models), is set to the
appropriate voltage.
2. Open the hood and ensure the
4- or 6-wire power supply cable
is seated into the connector on
the system board.
3. Check if a device is causing the
problem by removing ALL
attached devices. Power on the
system. If the system enters the
POST, then power off and
replace one device at a time
and repeat this procedure until
failure occurs. Replace the
device causing the failure.
Continue adding devices one at
a time to ensure all devices are
functioning properly.
4. Replace the power supply.
5. Replace the system board.
D–6 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Diskette Problems
Solving Diskette Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Diskette drive light stays on. Diskette is damaged. In Microsoft Windows XP, right-click
Start, click Explore, and select a
drive. Select File > Properties >
Tools. Under Error-checking,
click Check Now.
Diskette is incorrectly
inserted.
Remove diskette and reinsert.
Drive button is not
pushed in.
Push in drive button.
Files on diskette are
damaged.
Check the program diskettes.
Drive cable is not
properly connected.
Reconnect power cable. Ensure that
all four pins are connected.
Drive not found. Cable is loose. Reseat diskette drive data and
power cables.
Removable drive is not
seated properly.
Reseat the drive.
Diskette drive cannot write
to a diskette.
Diskette is not
formatted.
Format the diskette.
Diskette is
write-protected.
Use another diskette or remove the
write protection.
Writing to the wrong
drive.
Check the drive letter in the path
statement.
Not enough space is
left on the diskette.
Use another diskette.
Diskette write control is
enabled.
Use Computer Setup to check the
storage security feature disabled
settings.
Diskette is damaged. Replace the damaged diskette.
Cannot format diskette. Invalid media reported. When formatting a disk in MS-DOS,
you may need to specify diskette
capacity. For example, to format a
1.44-MB diskette, type the following
command at the MS-DOS prompt:
FORMAT A: /F:1440
Diskette is
write-protected.
Use another diskette or remove the
write protection.
Diskette write control is
enabled.
Use Computer Setup to check the
storage security feature disabled
settings.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–7
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
A problem has occurred
with a disk transaction.
The directory structure is
bad, or there is a
problem with a file.
In Windows XP, right-click Start,
click Explore, and select a drive.
Select File > Properties >
Tools. Under Error-checking,
click Check Now.
Diskette drive cannot read
a diskette.
Diskette is not
formatted.
Format the diskette.
You are using the wrong
diskette type for the
drive type.
Check the type of drive that you
are using and use the correct
diskette type.
You are reading the
wrong drive.
Check the drive letter in the path
statement.
Diskette is damaged. Replace the diskette with a new one.
“Invalid system disk”
message is displayed.
A diskette that does not
contain the system files
needed to start the
computer has been
inserted in the drive.
When drive activity stops, remove
the diskette and press the
Spacebar. The computer should
start up.
Diskette error has
occurred.
Restart the computer by pressing the
power button.
Cannot Boot to Diskette. Diskette is not bootable. Replace with a bootable diskette.
Diskette boot has been
disabled in Computer
Setup.
Run Computer Setup and enable
diskette boot in Storage > Boot
Order.
Run Computer Setup and enable
Removable Media Boot in
Storage > Storage Options >
Removable Media Boot.
✎Both steps should be used as
the Removable Media
Boot function overrides the
Boot Order enable
command.
Removable media boot
has been disabled in
Computer Setup.
Run Computer Setup and enable
Removable Media Boot in
Storage > Storage Options>
Removable Media Boot.
Network server mode is
enabled in Computer
Setup.
Run Computer Setup and disable
Network Server Mode in
Security > Password Options.
Solving Diskette Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Solution
D–8 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Hard Drive Problems
Solving Hard Drive Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Hard drive error occurs. Hard disk has bad
sectors or has failed.
Use a utility to locate and block
usage of bad sectors. If necessary,
reformat the hard disk.
In Windows XP, right-click Start,
click Explore, and select a drive.
Select File > Properties > Tools.
Under Error-checking, click
Check Now.
Disk transaction problem. Either the directory
structure is bad or there
is a problem with a file.
In Windows XP, right-click Start,
click Explore, and select a drive.
Select File > Properties > Tools.
Under Error-checking, click
Check Now.
Drive not found (identified). Loose cable. Check cable connections.
The system may not
have automatically
recognized a newly
installed device.
1. Check to see if the device is
listed within Computer Setup. If
it is listed, the probable cause is
a driver problem. If it is not
listed, the probable cause is a
hardware problem.
2. If this is a newly installed drive,
enter Setup and try adding a
POST delay under Advanced
> Power-On.
Drive’s controller is
disabled in Computer
Setup.
Run Computer Setup and enable the
SATA controllers in Storage >
Storage Options.
Drive responds slowly
immediately after
power-up.
Run Computer Setup and increase
the POST Delay in Advanced >
Power-On Options.
Nonsystem disk/NTLDR
missing message
System is trying to start
from a non bootable
diskette or USB device.
Remove the media from the drive.
System is trying to start
from a damaged hard
drive.
1. Insert a bootable diskette into
the diskette drive and restart the
computer.
2. Check hard drive format using
fdisk:
If NTFS formatting, use a third
party reader to evaluate the
drive.
If FAT32 formatting, the hard
drive cannot be accessed.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–9
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Nonsystem disk/NTLDR
missing message.
(continued)
System files missing or
not properly installed.
1. Insert a bootable system diskette
and restart.
2. Check hard drive format using
fdisk:
If NTFS formatting, use a third
party reader to evaluate the
drive.
If FAT32 formatting, the hard
drive cannot be accessed.
3. Install system files for the
appropriate operating system if
necessary.
Hard drive boot
disabled in Computer
Setup.
Run Computer Setup and enable the
hard drive entry in the Storage >
Boot Order list.
Bootable hard drive is
not attached as first in a
multi-hard drive
configuration.
If attempting to boot from a hard
drive, ensure it is attached to P60
SATA 0.
Bootable hard drive's
controller is not listed
first in the Boot Order.
Enter Computer Setup and select
Storage > Boot Order and
ensure the bootable hard drive's
controller is listed immediately under
the Hard Drive entry.
Computer will not start. Hard drive is damaged. Observe the beeps and LED lights
on the front of the computer. See
Appendix C “POST Error
Messages”.
Computer seems to be
locked up.
Program in use has
stopped responding to
commands.
1. Attempt the normal Windows
“Shut Down” procedure.
2. Press the power button for
four or more seconds to turn off
the power.
3. Restart the computer using the
power button.
Solving Hard Drive Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Solution
D–10 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving MultiBay Problems
Solving Display Problems
Solving MultiBay Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Drive not found. You attempted to hot
plug a removable
hard drive that has
DriveLock security
enabled. (This feature
supported on some
models.)
Shut down Windows and turn off
the computer. Insert the drive into
the MultiBay, if it is not already
inserted. Turn on the computer.
MultiBay is hidden in
Computer Setup.
Enter Computer Setup and set
MultiBay to Device Available in
Security > Device Security.
Solving Display Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Blank screen (no video). Monitor is not turned
on.
Turn on the monitor and check that
the monitor light is on.
The cable connections
are not correct.
Check the cable connections from
the monitor to the computer and to
the electrical outlet.
Bad monitor. Try a different monitor.
Screen blanking utility
installed or energy
saver features enabled.
Press any key or click the mouse
button and, if set, type your
password.
System ROM is
corrupted; system is
running in Boot Block
Emergency Recovery
Mode (indicated by
eight red blinks from the
power LED and eight
simultaneous beeps).
1. Reflash the system ROM with the
latest BIOS image.
2. Replace the system board.
Fixed-sync monitor will
not sync at the
resolution chosen.
Ensure that the monitor can accept
the same horizontal scan rate as the
resolution chosen.
Computer is in
standby mode.
Press the power button to resume
from standby mode.
ÄCAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby mode, do not hold down the
power button for more than four seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and
you will lose any unsaved data.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–11
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Blank screen (no video).
(continued)
Monitor cable plugged
into the wrong
connector.
If the computer system has both
an integrated graphics connector
and a graphics expansion card
connector, plug the monitor cable
into the expansion card connector.
✎If the graphics card is a
standard PCI expansion card,
you can enable the integrated
graphics in Computer Setup. If
a PCI-Express graphics card is
installed, the integrated
graphics can not be enabled.
Monitor settings in the
computer are not
compatible with the
monitor.
1. Restart the computer and press
F8 during startup when you see
“Press F8” in the bottom right
corner of the screen.
2. Using the keyboard arrow keys,
select Enable VGA Mode
and press Enter.
3. In Windows Control Panel,
double-click the Display icon
and select the Settings tab.
4. Use the sliding control to reset
the resolution.
Blank screen and the
power LED flashes Red five
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps five times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
problem is resolved.
Pre-video memory error. 1. Reseat DIMMs. Power on the
system.
2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to
isolate the faulty module.
3. Replace third-party memory
with HP memory.
4. Replace the system board.
Blank screen and the
power LED flashes Red six
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps six times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
problem is resolved.
Pre-video graphics
error.
For systems with a graphics card:
1. Reseat the graphics card.
2. Replace the graphics card.
3. Replace the system board.
For systems with integrated
graphics, replace the system board.
Solving Display Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Solution
D–12 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Blank screen and the
power LED flashes Red
seven times, once every
second, followed by a two
second pause, and the
computer beeps seven
times. Beeps continue for
five iterations after which
the LED flashes will
continue until the problem
is resolved.
System board failure
(ROM detected failure
prior to video.)
Replace the system board.
Monitor does not function
properly when used with
energy saver features.
Monitor without energy
saver capabilities is
being used with energy
saver features enabled.
Disable monitor energy saver
feature.
Dim characters. The brightness and
contrast controls are not
set properly.
Adjust the monitor brightness and
contrast controls.
Cables are not properly
connected.
Check that the graphics cable is
securely connected to the graphics
card and the monitor.
Blurry video or requested
resolution cannot be set.
If the graphics controller
was upgraded, the
correct video drivers
may not be loaded.
Install the video drivers included in
the upgrade kit.
Monitor is not capable
of displaying requested
resolution.
Change requested resolution.
Graphics card is bad. Replace the graphics card.
The picture is broken up,
rolls, jitters, or flashes.
The monitor connections
may be incomplete or
the monitor may be
incorrectly adjusted.
1. Be sure the monitor cable is
securely connected to the
computer.
2. In a two-monitor system or if
another monitor is in close
proximity, be sure the monitors
are not interfering with each
other’s electromagnetic field by
moving them apart.
3. Fluorescent lights or fans may
be too close to the monitor.
Monitor needs to be
degaussed.
Degauss the monitor.
Solving Display Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Solution
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–13
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Image is not centered. Position may need
adjustment.
Press the Menu button to access the
OSD menu. Select
ImageControl/Horizontal
Position or VerticalPosition to
adjust the horizontal or vertical
position of the image.
“No Connection, Check
Signal Cable” displays on
screen.
Monitor video cable is
disconnected.
Connect the video cable between
the monitor and computer.
ÄEnsure the computer power is
off while connecting the video
cable.
“Out of Range” displays on
screen.
Video resolution and
refresh rate are set
higher than what the
monitor supports.
Restart the computer and enter Safe
Mode. Change the settings to a
supported setting then restart the
computer so that the new settings
take effect.
Vibrating or rattling noise
coming from inside a CRT
monitor when powered on.
Monitor degaussing coil
has been activated.
None. It is normal for the
degaussing coil to be activated
when the monitor is powered on.
Clicking noise coming from
inside a CRT monitor.
Electronic relays have
been activated inside
the monitor.
None. It is normal for some monitors
to make a clicking noise when
turned on and off, when going in
and out of standby mode, and when
changing resolutions.
High pitched noise coming
from inside a flat panel
monitor.
Brightness and/or
contrast settings are too
high.
Lower brightness and/or contrast
settings.
Fuzzy focus; streaking,
ghosting, or shadowing
effects; horizontal scrolling
lines; faint vertical bars; or
unable to center the picture
on the screen.
(flat panel monitors using
an analog VGA input
connection only)
Flat panel monitor’s
internal digital
conversion circuits may
be unable to correctly
interpret the output
synchronization of the
graphics card.
1. Select the monitor’s
Auto-Adjustment option in the
monitor’s on-screen display
menu.
2. Manually synchronize the Clock
and Clock Phase on-screen
display functions. Download
SoftPaq SP20930 or SP22333,
depending on the monitor, to
assist with the synchronization.
Graphics card is not
seated properly or is
bad.
1. Reseat the graphics card.
2. Replace the graphics card.
Certain typed symbols do
not appear correct.
The font you are using
does not support that
particular symbol.
Use the Character Map to locate the
and select the appropriate symbol.
Click Start > All Programs >
Accessories > System Tools >
Character Map. You can copy
the symbol from the Character Map
into a document.
Solving Display Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Solution
D–14 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Audio Problems
Solving Audio Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Sound cuts in and out. Processor resources are
being used by other
applications.
Shut down all open
processor-intensive applications.
Direct sound latency,
common in many media
player applications.
In Windows XP:
1. From the Control Panel,
select Sounds and Audio
Devices.
2. On the Audio tab, select a
device from the Sound
Playback list.
3. Click the Advanced, button
and select the Performance
tab.
4. Set the Hardware
acceleration slider to None
and the Sample rate
conversion quality slider to
Good and retest the audio.
5. Set the Hardware
acceleration slider to Full
and the Sample rate
conversion quality slider to
Best and retest the audio.
Sound does not come
out of the speaker or
headphones.
Software volume control
is turned down.
Double-click the Speaker icon on
the taskbar and use the volume
slider to adjust the volume.
The external speakers
are not turned on.
Turn on the external speakers.
Audio is hidden in
Computer Setup.
Enable the audio in Computer
Setup: Security > Device
Security >Audio.
External speakers
plugged into the wrong
audio jack.
See the sound card documentation
for proper speaker connection.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–15
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Sound does not come
out of the speaker or
headphones. (continued)
Digital CD audio is not
enabled.
Enable digital CD audio:
1. From the Control Panel, select
System.
2. On the Hardware tab, click
the Device Manager button.
3. Right-click on the CD/DVD
device and select Properties.
4. On the Properties tab, make
sure “Enable digital CD
audio for this CD-ROM
device” is checked.
Headphones or devices
connected to the
line-out connector mute
the internal speaker.
Turn on and use headphones or
external speakers, if connected, or
disconnect headphones or external
speakers.
Volume is muted. 1. From the Control Panel
program, click Sound,
Speech and Audio
Devices, then click Sounds
and Audio Devices.
2. Click the Mute check box to
remove the check mark from
the box.
Computer is in
standby mode.
Press the power button to resume
from standby mode.
ÄCAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby mode, do not hold down the
power button for more than four seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and
any unsaved data will be lost.
Sound from headphones is
not clear or muffled.
Headphones are
plugged into the rear
audio output connector.
The rear audio
connector is for
powered audio devices
and is not designed for
headphone use.
Plug the headphones into the
headphone connector on the front of
the computer.
Computer appears to be
locked up while recording
audio.
The hard disk may be
full.
1. Before recording, make sure
there is enough free space on
the hard disk.
2. Try recording the audio file in a
compressed format.
Solving Audio Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Solution
D–16 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Printer Problems
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems
Solving Printer Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Printer will not print. Printer is not turned on
and online.
Turn the printer on and make sure it
is online.
The correct printer
driver for the
application are not
installed.
1. Install the correct printer driver
for the application.
2. Try printing using the
MS-DOS command:
DIR C:\ > [printer port]
where [printer port] is the
address of the printer being
used. If the printer works, reload
the printer driver.
If you are on a network,
you may not have made
the connection to the
printer.
Make the proper network
connections to the printer.
Printer may have failed. Run printer self-test.
Printer will not turn on. The cables may not be
connected properly.
Reconnect all cables.
Printer prints garbled
information.
The correct printer
driver is not installed.
Install the correct printer driver for
the application.
The cables may not be
connected properly.
Reconnect all cables.
Printer memory may be
overloaded.
Reset the printer by turning it off for
one minute, then turn it back on.
Printer is offline. The printer may be out
of paper.
1. Check the paper tray and refill it
if it is empty.
2. Select online.
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Keyboard commands and
typing are not recognized
by the computer.
Keyboard connector
is not properly
connected.
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Reconnect the keyboard to the
back of the computer and
restart the computer.
Program in use has
stopped responding
to commands.
Shut down the computer using
the mouse and then restart the
computer.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–17
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Keyboard commands and
typing are not recognized
by the computer.
(continued)
Keyboard needs
repairs.
Replace the keyboard.
Wireless device error. 1. Check software, if available, for
device battery status.
2. Replace device batteries.
3. Reset receiver and keyboard.
Computer is in
standby mode.
Press the power button to resume
from standby mode.
ÄCAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby mode, do not hold down the
power button for more than four seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and
any unsaved data will be lost.
Cursor will not move using
the arrow keys on the
keypad.
The Num Lock key
may be on.
Press the Num Lock key. The
Num Lock light should not be on if
you want to use the arrow keys. The
Num Lock key can be disabled
(or enabled) in Computer Setup.
Mouse does not respond to
movement or is too slow.
Mouse connector is
not properly plugged
into the back of the
computer.
1. Shut down the computer using
the keyboard.
2. Plug the mouse connector into
the back of the computer (or the
keyboard) and restart the
computer.
Program in use has
stopped responding
to commands.
Shut down the computer using the
keyboard and then restart the
computer.
Mouse may need
cleaning.
Remove the roller ball cover on the
mouse and clean it.
Mouse needs repairs. Replace the mouse.
Wireless device error. 1. Check software, if available, for
device battery status.
2. Replace device batteries.
3. Reset receiver and mouse.
Computer is in
standby mode.
Press the power button to resume
from standby mode.
ÄCAUTION: When attempting to resume from standby mode, do not hold down the
power button for more than four seconds. Otherwise, the computer will shut down and
you will lose any unsaved data.
Mouse will only move
vertically or horizontally, or
movement is jerky.
Mouse roller ball is
dirty.
Remove roller ball cover from the
bottom of the mouse and clean it.
Solving Keyboard and Mouse Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Solution
D–18 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Hardware Installation Problems
You may need to reconfigure the computer when you add or remove hardware, such as an
additional diskette drive. If you install a plug and play device, Windows XP automatically
recognize the device and configure the computer. If you install a non–plug and play device, you
must reconfigure the computer after completing installation of the new hardware. In Windows
XP, use the Add Hardware Wizard and follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
Solving Hardware Installation Problems
Problem Cause Solution
A new device is not
recognized as part of
the system.
Device is not seated or
connected properly.
Ensure that the device is properly
and securely connected and that
pins in the connector are not
bent down.
Cable(s) of new
external device are
loose or power cables
are unplugged.
Ensure that all cables are properly
and securely connected and that
pins in the cable or connector are
not bent down.
Power switch of new
external device is not
turned on.
Turn off the computer, turn on the
external device, then turn on the
computer to integrate the device
with the computer system.
When the system
advised you of changes
to the configuration, you
did not accept them.
Reboot the computer and follow the
instructions for accepting the
changes.
A plug and play board
may not automatically
configure when
added if the default
configuration conflicts
with other devices.
Use Windows XP Device Manager
to deselect the automatic settings for
the board and choose a basic
configuration that does not cause a
resource conflict. You can also use
Computer Setup to reconfigure or
disable devices to resolve the
resource conflict.
Computer will not start. Wrong memory
modules were used in
the upgrade or memory
modules were installed
in the wrong location.
1. Review the documentation that
came with the system to
determine if you are using the
correct memory modules and to
verify the proper installation.
2. Observe the beeps and LED
lights on the front of the
computer. See Appendix C
“POST Error Messages” to
determine possible causes.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–19
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Power LED flashes Red five
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps five times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
problem is resolved.
Memory is installed
incorrectly or is bad.
1. Reseat DIMMs.
2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to
isolate the faulty module.
3. Replace third-party memory
with HP memory.
4. Replace the system board.
Power LED flashes Red six
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps six times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
problem is resolved.
Video card is not seated
properly or is bad, or
system board is bad.
For systems with a graphics card:
1. Reseat the graphics card. Power
on the system.
2. Replace the graphics card.
3. Replace the system board.
For systems with integrated
graphics, replace the system board.
Power LED flashes Red ten
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps ten times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
problem is resolved
Bad option card. 1. Check each option card by
removing the cards one at time
(if multiple cards), then power
on the system to see if fault goes
away.
2. Once bad card is identified,
remove and replace bad option
card.
3. Replace the system board.
Solving Hardware Installation Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Solution
D–20 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Network Problems
These guidelines do not discuss the process of debugging the network cabling.
Solving Network Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Wake-on-LAN feature is
not functioning.
Wake-on-LAN is not
enabled.
Use the Network Connections
application in Control Panel to
enable Wake-on-LAN.
Network driver does
not detect network
controller.
Network controller is
disabled.
1. Run Computer Setup and
enable network controller.
2. Enable the network controller in
the operating system via the
Device Manager.
Incorrect network driver. Check the network controller
documentation for the correct driver
or obtain the latest driver from the
manufacturer’s Web site.
Network status link light
does not turn on or it
never flashes.
✎The network status
light should flash
when there is
network activity.
No active network is
detected.
Check cabling and network
equipment for proper connection.
Network controller is not
set up properly.
Use the Network control application
to verify that the device is working
properly.
Network controller is
disabled.
1. Run Computer Setup and
enable network controller.
2. Enable the network controller in
the operating system via Device
Manager.
Network driver is not
properly loaded.
Reinstall network drivers.
System cannot autosense
the network.
Disable auto-sensing capabilities
and force the system into the correct
operating mode.
Diagnostics reports a
failure.
The cable is not securely
connected.
Ensure that both ends of the data
cable are securely connected.
The cable is attached to
the incorrect connector.
Ensure that the cable is attached to
the correct connector.
There is a problem with
the cable or a device at
the other end of the cable.
Ensure that the cable and device at
the other end are operating
correctly.
Network controller
interrupt is shared with
an expansion board.
Under the Computer Setup
Advanced menu, change the
resource settings for the board.
The network controller
is defective.
Replace the system board (NIC is
integral to the system board).
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–21
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Diagnostics passes, but
the computer does not
communicate with the
network.
Network drivers are not
loaded, or driver
parameters do not match
current configuration.
Make sure the network drivers are
loaded and that the driver
parameters match the configuration
of the network controller.
Make sure the correct network client
and protocol is installed.
The network controller is
not configured for this
computer.
Select the Network icon in the
Control Panel and configure the
network controller.
Network controller
stopped working when
an expansion board was
added to the computer.
Network controller
interrupt is shared with an
expansion board.
Under the Computer Setup
Advanced menu, change the
resource settings for the board.
The network controller
requires drivers.
Verify that the drivers were not
accidentally deleted when the
drivers for a new expansion board
were installed.
The expansion board
installed is a network card
(NIC) and conflicts with
the embedded NIC.
Under the Computer Setup
Advanced menu, change the
resource settings for the board.
Network controller stops
working without apparent
cause.
The files containing the
network drivers are
corrupted.
Reinstall the network drivers, using
the Restore Plus! CD.
The cable is not securely
connected.
Ensure that the cable is securely
attached to the network connector
and that the other end of the cable
is securely attached to the correct
device.
The network controller is
defective.
Replace the system board.
New network card will
not boot.
New network card may be
defective or may not meet
industry-standard
specifications.
Install a working, industry-standard
NIC, or change the boot sequence
to boot from another source.
Cannot connect to
network server when
attempting Remote
System Installation.
The network controller is
not configured properly.
Verify Network Connectivity, that a
DHCP Server is present, and that
the Remote System Installation
Server contains the NIC drivers for
your NIC.
System setup utility
reports unprogrammed
EEPROM.
Unprogrammed EEPROM. Flash the ROM.
Solving Network Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Solution
D–22 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Memory Problems
ÄCAUTION: For those systems that support ECC memory, HP does not support mixing ECC and non-ECC
memory. Otherwise, the system will not boot the operating system.
Solving Memory Problems
Problem Cause Solution
System will not boot or
does not function properly
after installing additional
memory modules.
Memory module is not
the correct type or
speed or the new
memory module is not
seated properly.
Replace module with the correct
industry-standard device for the
computer.
On some models, ECC and non-ECC
memory modules cannot be mixed.
Out of memory error. Memory configuration
may not be set up
correctly.
Use the Device Manager to check
memory configuration.
You have run out of
memory to run the
application.
Check the application
documentation to determine the
memory requirements.
Memory count during POST
is wrong.
The memory modules
may not be installed
correctly.
Check that the memory modules
have been installed correctly and
that proper modules are used.
Integrated graphics may
use system memory.
No action required.
Insufficient memory error
during operation.
Too many Terminate
and Stay Resident
programs (TSRs) are
installed.
Delete any TSRs that you do
not need.
You have run out of
memory for the
application.
Check the memory requirements for
the application or add more
memory to the computer.
Power LED flashes Red five
times, once every second,
followed by a two second
pause, and the computer
beeps five times. Beeps
continue for five iterations
after which the LED flashes
will continue until the
problem is resolved.
Memory is installed
incorrectly or is bad.
1. Reseat DIMMs.
2. Replace DIMMs one at a time to
isolate the faulty module.
3. Replace third-party memory
with HP memory.
4. Replace the system board.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–23
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Processor Problems
.
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems
Solving Processor Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Poor performance is
experienced.
Processor is hot. 1. Make sure the airflow to the
computer is not blocked.
2. Make sure the fans are
connected and working
properly (some fans only
operate when needed).
3. Make sure the processor
heatsink is installed properly.
Power LED flashes Red
three times, once every
second, followed by a two
second pause, and the
computer beeps three
times. Beeps continue for
five iterations after which
the LED flashes will
continue until the problem
is resolved.
Processor is not seated
properly or not
installed.
1. Check to see that the processor
is present.
2. Reseat the processor.
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems
Problem Cause Solution
System will not boot from
CD-ROM or DVD drive.
Removable Media Boot
is not enabled through
the Computer Setup
utility.
Run the Computer Setup utility and
enable booting to removable media
and verify boot order settings.
Non-bootable CD in
drive.
Try a bootable CD in the drive.
Network Server Mode
is enabled in Computer
Setup.
Run Computer Setup and disable
Network Server Mode in Security
> Password Options.
Boot order not correct. Run Computer Setup and change
boot sequence in Storage > Boot
Order.
CD-ROM or DVD devices
are not detected or driver is
not loaded.
Drive is not connected
properly or not properly
configured.
1. Reconnect power and data
cables to the drive.
2. Install correct device driver.
Movie will not play in the
DVD drive.
Movie may be
regionalized for a
different country.
See the documentation that came
with the DVD drive.
D–24 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Movie will not play in the
DVD drive. (continued)
Decoder software is not
installed.
Install decoder software.
Damaged media. Replace media.
Movie rating locked out
by parental lock.
Use DVD software to remove
parental lock.
Media installed upside
down.
Reinstall media.
Cannot eject compact disc
(tray-load unit).
Disc not properly seated
in the drive.
1. Turn off the computer and insert
a thin metal rod into the
emergency eject hole and push
firmly.
2. Slowly pull the tray out from the
drive until the tray is fully
extended, then remove the disc.
CD-ROM, CD-RW,
DVD-ROM, or DVD-R/RW
drive cannot read a disc or
takes too long to start.
Media has been
inserted upside down.
Re-insert the Media with the label
facing up.
The DVD-ROM drive
takes longer to start
because it has to
determine the type of
media played, such as
audio or video.
Wait at least 30 seconds to let the
DVD-ROM drive determine the type
of media being played. If the disc
still does not start, read the other
solutions listed for this topic.
CD or DVD disc is dirty. Clean CD or DVD with a CD
cleaning kit.
Windows does not
detect the CD-ROM or
DVD-ROM drive.
1. Use Device Manager to remove
or uninstall the device in
question.
2. Restart the computer and let
Windows detect the device.
Recording audio CDs is
difficult or impossible.
Wrong or poor quality
media type.
1. Try using a slower recording
speed.
2. Verify that you are using the
correct media for the drive.
3. Try a different brand of media.
Quality varies widely between
manufacturers.
Solving CD-ROM and DVD Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Solution
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–25
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Drive Key Problems
Solving Front Panel Component Problems
Solving Drive Key Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Drive Key is not seen as a
drive letter in Windows XP.
The drive letter after the
last physical drive is not
available.
Change the default drive letter for
the Drive Key in Windows XP.
The computer boots to DOS
after making a bootable
Drive Key.
Drive Key is bootable. Install the Drive Key after the
operating system boots.
Solving Front Panel Component Problems
Problem Cause Solution
A USB device, headphone,
or microphone is not
recognized by the
computer.
It is not properly
connected.
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Reconnect the device to the front of
the computer and restart the
computer.
The device does not
have power.
If the USB device requires AC power,
be sure one end is connected to the
device and one end is connected to a
live outlet.
The correct device
driver is not installed.
1. Install the correct driver for the
device.
2. You might need to reboot the
computer.
The cable from the
device to the computer
does not work.
1. If possible, replace the cable.
2. Restart the computer.
The device is not
working.
1. Replace the device.
2. Restart the computer.
D–26 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Solving Internet Access Problems
Solving Internet Access Problems
Problem Cause Solution
Unable to connect to the
Internet.
Internet Service Provider
(ISP) account is not set
up properly.
Verify Internet settings or contact the
ISP for assistance.
Modem is not set up
properly.
Reconnect the modem. Verify the
connections are correct using the
quick setup documentation.
Web browser is not set
up properly.
Verify that the Web browser is
installed and set up to work with
your ISP.
Cable/ DSL modem is
not plugged in.
Plug in cable/DSL modem. You
should see a “power” LED light on
the front of the cable/DSL modem.
Cable/DSL service is
not available or has
been interrupted due to
bad weather.
Try connecting to the Internet at a
later time or contact your ISP. (If the
cable/DSL service is connected, the
“cable” LED light on the front of the
cable/DSL modem will be on.)
The CAT5 UTP cable is
disconnected.
Connect the CAT5 UTP cable
between the cable modem and the
computers’s RJ-45 connector. (If the
connection is good, the “PC” LED
light on the front of the cable/DSL
modem will be on.)
IP address is not
configured properly.
Contact the ISP for the correct IP
address.
Cookies are corrupted. Windows XP
1. Select Start > Control
Panel.
2. Double-click Internet
Options.
3. On the General tab, click the
Delete Cookies button.
Cannot automatically
launch Internet programs.
You must log on to the
ISP before some
programs will start.
Log on to the ISP and launch the
desired program.
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 D–27
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Internet takes too long to
download Web sites.
Modem is not set up
properly.
Verify that the correct modem speed
and COM port are selected.
For Windows XP
1. Select Start > Control
Panel.
2. Double-click System.
3. Click the Hardware tab.
4. In the Device Manager area,
click the Device Manager
button.
5. Double-click Ports (COM &
LPT).
6. Right-click the COM port your
modem uses, then click
Properties.
7. U n d e r Device status, verify
that the modem is working
properly.
8. Under Device usage, verify
the modem is enabled.
9. If there are further problems,
click the Troubleshoot button
and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Solving Internet Access Problems (Continued)
Problem Cause Solution
D–28 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Troubleshooting Without Diagnostics
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 E–1
E
System Board and Riser Board Reference
Designators
These reference designators are used on most but not all HP system and riser boards.
Designator Component
BAT
CR1
CR2
CR3
CR4
Battery socket/Battery
LED - 5V_Aux (on)
Health-LED
UID LED
Power LED
CR35
E14
E15
E25
E49/JP49
Hard drive activity LED
Boot block header/jumper
Boot block recovery header
CPLD programming header
Clear Password header/jumper
E50
J7
J9
J10
J11
Clear CMOS header
RJ45 jack
Stacked RJ45/Dual USB
Quad stacked USB
First IEEE 1394 connector
J12
J13
J14
J20 - 29
J30
Second IEEE 1394 connector
SPDIF input
SPDIF output
PCI slots
PCI extender slot (male)
J31 - J35
J37
J38
J39
J40
PCI Express slots
Primary SCSI connector
Secondary SCSI connector
Stacked parallel/SCSI connector
AGP slot
J41
J50
J51
J52
J53
x16 PCI Express slot for graphics
First parallel port
Second parallel port
Double-stacked parallel port, Top = Port B, Bottom = Port A
Parallel port over single Serial Port
J54
J55
J65
J66
J67
Parallel port over Serial Port and Video Port
Parallel port over dual VGA ports
DVI connector
Keyboard connector, PS/2 (Closest to power supply)
Mouse connector, PS/2
E–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators
J68
J69
J70
J71
J72
Stacked mouse (Top)/keyboard (Bottom) connector
Video connector, VGA
Primary single USB connector
Secondary single USB port
Microphone jack
J73
J74
J75
J76
J77
Line-in jack
Line-out jack
Headphone jack
Volume control
Double-stacked headphone (Bottom)/microphone (Top) connector
J78
J80
J81
J82
J83
Double-stacked line-in (Top)/line-out (Bottom) connector
Stacked serial/audio connector
Primary double-stack USB, Top = Port 2, Bottom = Port 1
Secondary double-stack USB, Top = Port 4, Bottom = Port 3
Triple-stacked audio jack (line in, line out/headphone, microphone)
J101
J9020-J9029
J9030-J9034
JP49/E49
L1
Security board connector, daughter card
PCI slots on riser card
PCI express slots on riser card
Clear password header/jumper
USB front port choke (1st)
L2
L3
L4
L5
P1
USB rear port choke (1st)
USB rear port choke (2nd)
USB rear port choke (3rd)
USB front port choke (2nd)
P/S connector (20 or 24 pin)
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
Second P/S connector (as required)
VCCP 12V header
Secondary Processor 12V header
Main Power/HDD LED connector
Speaker connector
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
Audio connector (from CD-ROM)
Primary chassis fan connector
Secondary chassis fan connector
Diskette drive connector
Auxiliary Audio connector
P12
P13
P15
P16
P17
Alert on LAN NIC connector
VRM module footprint
AUI connector
Fan command/fan sink header (may be 2 or 4 pin)
Digital audio expansion header
P18
P19
P20
P21
P22
SPDIF internal input header
SPDIF internal output header
Primary IDE connector
Secondary IDE/MultiBay connector
Header for NEWCARD
Designator Component (Continued)
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 E–3
System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
Header for front panel audio
Header for front panel USB
Internal USB connector 1
Internal USB connector 2
MultiBay header
P29
P30
P40
P41
P52
SCSI LED connector
PCI extender slot (female)
Blade PC graphics connector (outboard)
Blade PC graphics connector (inboard)
Second serial port
P54
P55
P58
P60
P61
Primary serial port
Double stack serial port, Top = Serial B, Bottom = Serial A
Riser edge connector (male-mates with J30)
Primary Serial ATA (SATA) connector
Second Serial ATA (SATA) connector
P62
P63
P64
P65
P66
Third Serial ATA (SATA) connector
Fourth Serial ATA (SATA) connector
VSFF expansion connector
Graphics option connector
Fifth Serial ATA (SATA) connector
P67
P68
P69
P70
P71
Sixth Serial ATA (SATA) connector
Seventh Serial ATA (SATA) connector
Eighth Serial ATA (SATA) connector
Primary (CPU) fan header for fansink
Secondary CPU fan header for fansink
P80
P81
P82
P83
P84
Primary Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector
Second Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector
Third Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector
Fourth Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connector
Fifth Serial Attached (SAS) connector
P85
P86
P87
P101
P106
Sixth Serial Attached (SAS) connector
Seventh Serial Attached (SAS) connector
Eighth Serial Attached (SAS) connector
Security board connector, system board
Secondary speaker header
P124
P125
P126
P216
SW2
Hood lock header
Hood sensor header
Flying parallel port header
White box chassis fan header
Security hood switch on riser card
SW50
U2
U3
U4
U5
Clear CMOS switch/push button
Single chip solution (combined north bridge/south bridge)
North bridge
South bridge
Super I/O
Designator Component (Continued)
E–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
System Board and Riser Board Reference Designators
U6
U7
U10
U11
U12
Clock chip
64 bit Bridge
LOM1
LOM1 EEPROM
LOM1 PHY
U13
U14
U16
U17
U18
Audio Codec
Audio amplifier
LOM2
LOM2 EEPROM
LOM2 PHY
U19
U20
U29
U30
U31
SPI ROM
Fan controller
TMDS controller
Parallel port diode array
First serial port transceiver
U32
U46
U50
U51
U52
Second serial port transceiver
VRM controller
USB front port power switch
First USB rear port power switch
Second USB rear port power switch
U53
XBT
XMM1
XMM2 - XMM5
XU1
Third USB rear port power switch
Battery retainer
Memory slot. DIMM1 or RIMM1 populated and tested
Following memory slots
Primary processor socket
XU2
XU15/U15
XU19/U19
Y1
Y2
Secondary processor socket
System ROM and Socket (Socket = XU15, ROM = U15)
SPI ROM and socket (XU19 = socket, U19 = SPI ROM)
Primary (TH) system clock crystal
Secondary (SMT) system clock crystal
Y3
Y4
Y5/H5
Primary NIC clock crystal
Secondary NIC clock crystal
RTC clock crystal/tie-down
Designator Component (Continued)
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 F–1
F
Memory
The dc7600 series computers with Intel-based processors come with double data rate 2
synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR2-SDRAM) dual inline memory modules
(DIMMs).
ÄCAUTION: DDR and DDR2 memory modules are not interchangeable.
DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs
The memory sockets on the system board can be populated with up to four industry-standard
DIMMs. These memory module sockets are populated with at least one preinstalled memory
module. To achieve the maximum memory support, you can populate the system board with up
to 4GB of memory configured in a high-performing dual channel mode.
For proper system operation, the DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs must be:
■industry-standard 240-pin
■unbuffered PC2 4200 533 MHz-compliant or PC2 5300 667 MHz-compliant
■1.8volt DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs
The DDR2-SDRAM DIMMs must also:
■support CAS latency 4 (CL = 4) for PC2 4200 533 MHz or CAS latency 5 (CL = 5) for PC2
5300 667 MHz
■contain the mandatory JEDEC SPD information
In addition, the computer supports:
■256Mbit, 512Mbit, AND 1 Gbit non-ECC memory technologies (all three Mbit technologies
may be used with each other with no performance degradation)
■single-sided and double-sided DIMMS
■DIMMs constructed with x8 and x16 DDR devices; DIMMs constructed with x4 SDRAM
are not supported
DIMM Sockets
There are four DIMM sockets on the system board, with two sockets per channel. The sockets are
labeled XMM1, XMM2, XMM3, and XMM4. Sockets XMM1 and XMM2 operate in memory
channel A. Sockets XMM3 and XMM4 operate in memory channel B.
F–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Memory
The system board shown may differ from the one in your product.
The system will automatically operate in single channel mode, dual channel Asymmetric mode,
or a a higher-performing dual channel Interleaved mode, depending on how the DIMMs are
installed.
To identify the operating mode, run Computer Setup and select the System Information menu
item. The operating memory mode will appear in the line showing the system total memory.
■The system will operate in single channel mode if the DIMM sockets are populated in one
channel only.
■The system will operate in dual channel Asymmetric mode if the total memory capacity of
the DIMMs in Channel A is not equal to the total memory capacity of the DIMMs in
Channel B.
■The system will operate in a higher-performing dual channel Interleaved mode if the total
memory capacity of the DIMMs in Channel A is equal to the total memory capacity of the
DIMMs in Channel B. However, the technology and device width can vary between the
channels, For example, if Channel A is populated with two 256 MB DIMMS and Channel B
is populated with one 512 MB DIMM, the system will operate in Interleaved mode.
■In any mode, the maximum operational speed is determined by the slowest DIMM in the
system.
Item Description Socket Color
1DIMM socket XMM1, Channel A Black
2DIMM socket XMM2, Channel A White
3DIMM socket XMM3, Channel B Black
4DIMM socket XMM4, Channel B White
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 Index–1
Index
4-pin power pin assignments A–7
24-pin MicroFit power pin assignments A–7
24-pin power pin assignments A–7, A–11
6-pin power pin assignments A–8
A
access panel
CMT removal and replacement 6–5
USDT removal and replacement 8–4
Altiris 3–2
Deployment Solution Agent 3–2
HP Client Management Solutions 3–4
asset tracking 3–14
ATA/ATAPI (IDE) drive cable pin assignments
A–6
B
backing up files 1–2
battery
CMT removal and replacement 6–29
disposal 5–9
SFF removal and replacement 7–48
USDT removal and replacement 8–25
bezel blank
CMT removal and replacement 6–8
bezel insert
SFF removal and replacement 7–11
blank screen D–10, D–11
Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode 3–7
C
cable
CMT hard drive 6–20
proper handling 5–8
cable lock
CMT 6–4
SFF 7–5
USDT 8–3
cable management
CMT 6–9
SFF 7–13
USDT 8–10
cable pinouts
PATA data 4–3
PATA power 4–4
SATA data 4–2
SATA power 4–2
cautions
AC power 5–1
adding devices 1–1
cables 5–8
cooling fan 5–7
cover lock security 3–22
electrostatic discharge 5–3
FailSafe Key 3–23
keyboard cleaning 5–6
keyboard keys 5–6
operating system installation 1–1
protecting ROM 3–7
change notification 3–6
changing password 3–19
chassis
CMT illustrated 5–1
SFF illustrated 5–2
USDT illustrated 5–2
chassis fan
CMT removal and replacement 6–37
SFF removal and replacement 7–47
USDT removal and replacement 8–9
chassis types, illustrated 5–1
cleaning
computer 5–6
keyboard 5–6
monitor 5–7
mouse 5–7
clearing password 3–20
CMT
5.25" drive bezel removal and replacement 6–7
access panel removal and replacement 6–5
battery removal and replacement 6–29
bezel blank removal and replacement 6–8
cable lock removal and replacement 6–4
cable management 6–9
chassis fan removal and replacement 6–37
chassis, illustrated 5–1
Index–2 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Index
desktop to minitower conversion 6–39
disassembly preparation 6–1
diskette drive bezel removal and replacement
6–8
diskette drive removal and replacement 6–25
drive positions 6–19
expansion card guide removal and replacement
6–18
expansion card removal and replacement 6–13
expansion card retainer latch removal and
replacement 6–16
expansion slot cover removal and replacement
6–12, 6–16
external security 6–4
FailSafe key 6–2
front bezel removal and replacement 6–6
front I/O device removal and replacement 6–26
hard drive cable removal and replacement 6–20
hard drive removal and replacement 6–20
heatsink removal and replacement 6–33
hood sensor removal and replacement 6–3
memory removal and replacement 6–10
minitower to desktop conversion 6–42
optical drive removal and replacement 6–22
padlock removal and replacement 6–4
PCI Express card removal and replacement
6–14
PCI retainer latch removal and replacement
6–16
power supply removal and replacement 6–38
power switch assembly removal and
replacement 6–27
preparation for disassembly 6–1
Smart Cover Lock removal and replacement 6–2
speaker removal and replacement 6–36
system board removal and replacement 6–28
tamper-proof screws 6–2
computer cleaning 5–6
computer cover
SFF removal and replacement 7–10
computer pauses D–2
Computer Setup
accessing 2–3
Advanced menu 2–11
File menu 2–4
overview 2–2
Security menu 2–8
Storage menu 2–5
configuring power button 3–13
connector pin assignments A–1 to A–7
conversion
CMT desktop to minitower 6–39
CMT minitower to desktop 6–42
Convertible Minitower See CMT
country-specific power cord set requirements B–2
cover lock, smart 3–22
D
Dantz Retrospect Express 3–5
date and time display problems D–2
DDR2 memory F–1
deleting password 3–19
delimiter characters, table 3–20
device drivers, installing/upgrading 1–1
diagnostic tool for hard drives 3–24
diagnostics utility 2–14
DIMMs F–1
disassembly preparation
CMT 6–1
SFF 7–1
USDT 8–1
diskette drive
CMT removal and replacement 6–25
SFF removal and replacement 7–29
diskette drive bezel
CMT removal and replacement 6–8
SFF removal and replacement 7–11
drive
capacities 4–5
CMT diskette drive removal and replacement
6–25
CMT hard drive removal and replacement 6–20
CMT optical drive removal and replacement
6–22
partition size 4–5
protecting 3–24
SFF external removal and replacement 7–29
SFF hard drive removal and replacement 7–31
SFF optical drive removal and replacement
7–27
USDT hard drive removal and replacement
8–18
drive bezel inserts
CMT 6–7
SFF 7–12
drive positions
CMT 6–19
SFF 7–26
Drivelock 3–20
dual-state power button 3–13
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 Index–3
Index
E
electrostatic discharge. See ESD
entering
power-on password 3–18
setup password 3–18
error messages, POST C–1 to C–7
ESD (electrostatic discharge)
materials and equipment 5–4
preventing damage 5–3
Ethernet
AUI pin assignments A–2
BNC pin assignments A–1
RJ-45 pin assignments A–2
expansion card
CMT PCI Express socket removal and
replacement 6–14
CMT standard socket removal and replacement
6–13
SFF PCI Express socket removal and
replacement 7–19
SFF standard socket removal and replacement
7–17
USDT removal and replacement 8–14
expansion card guide, CMT removal and
replacement 6–18
expansion card retainer, SFF removal and
replacement 7–16
expansion card retaining latch, USDT removal and
replacement 8–16
expansion slot cover
CMT removal and replacement 6–12
SFF removal and replacement 7–17
external 3.5-inch drive
SFF removal and replacement 7–29
F
FailSafe key
CMT 6–2
SFF 7–2
fan shroud, SFF removal and replacement 7–35
fan, power supply 5–7
FAT or FAT32 to NTFS conversion 1–2
fault notification 3–24
flashing LEDs C–9
front bezel
CMT removal and replacement 6–6
USDT removal and replacement 8–7
front drive bezel
CMT removal and replacement 6–7
SFF removal and replacement 7–11
front I/O device
CMT removal and replacement 6–26
SFF removal and replacement 7–36
USDT removal and replacement 8–20
G
grounding methods 5–4
H
hard drive
CMT removal and replacement 6–20
diagnostic tool 3–24
proper handling 5–8
SFF removal and relacement 7–31
USDT removal and replacement 8–18
headphone pin assignments A–4
heatsink
CMT removal and replacement 6–33
SFF removal and replacement 7–38
USDT removal and replacement 8–21
hood sensor
CMT removal and replacement 6–3
SFF removal and replacement 7–4
HP Client Management Solutions 3–4
HP Client Manager 3–3
HP Insight Diagnostics 2–14
HP Local Recovery 3–5
HP software. See software
HP System Software Manager 3–3
I
image deployment methods 3–1
infrared (IR) transceiver, external, pin assignments
A–5
initial configuration 3–1
Insight Diagnostics 2–14
K
keyboard
cleaning 5–6
delimiter characters, national 3–20
pin assignments A–1
L
LEDs
blinking power C–9
blinking PS/2 keyboard C–9
line-in audio pin assignments A–4
line-out audio pin assignments A–4
Local Recovery 3–2
locking Smart Cover Lock 3–23
Index–4 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Index
M
memory
CMT removal and replacement 6–10
DDR2 specifications F–1
SFF removal and replacement 7–14
socket assignments F–2
USDT removal and replacement 8–11
microphone pin assignments A–3
monitor
blank screen D–10, D–11
blurry video D–12
cleaning 5–7
dim characters D–12
pin assignments A–5
mouse
cleaning 5–7
pin assignments A–1
MultiBay
CD-ROM adapter pin assignments A–6
security 3–20
USDT removal and replacement 8–5
USDT riser card removal and replacement 8–6
N
national keyboard delimiter characters 3–20
notification of hardware and software changes 3–6
O
optical drive
CMT removal and replacement 6–22
SFF removal and replacement 7–27
overheating, prevention 5–5
P
padlock
CMT 6–4
SFF 7–6
USDT 8–3
parallel interface pin assignments A–3
password
changing 3–19
clearing 3–20
deleting 3–19
options 2–8
power-on 2–8, 3–18
security 3–17
setup 2–8, 3–17, 3–18
PATA
data cable pinouts 4–3
power cable pinouts 4–4
PCI Express expansion card
CMT removal and replacement 6–14
SFF removal and replacement 7–19
PCI Express pin assignments A–9
PCN (Proactive Change Notification) 3–6
POST (Power-On Self-Test) 2–1
POST error messages C–1 to C–7
power button, configuring 3–13
power cord set requirements
country specific B–2
general B–1
power supply
CMT removal and replacement 6–38
fan 5–7
SFF removal and replacement 7–42
USDT removal and replacement 8–24
power switch assembly
CMT removal and replacement 6–27
SFF removal and replacement 7–37
power-on password
changing 3–19
deleting 3–19
entering 3–18
Power-On Self-Test (POST) 2–1
Preboot Execution Environment (PXE) 3–2
Proactive Change Notification (PCN) 3–6
problems, solving
audio D–14
CD-ROM and DVD D–23
diskette D–6
display D–10, D–11
drive key D–25
front panel components D–25
hard drive D–8
hardware installation D–18
Internet access D–26
keyboard D–16
memory D–22
mouse D–16
MultiBay D–10
network D–20
optical drives D–23
power supply D–5
printer D–16
processor D–23
processor
CMT removal and replacement 6–34
SFF removal and replacement 7–39
USDT removal and replacement 8–22
protecting ROM 3–7
PXE (Preboot Execution Environment) 3–2
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 Index–5
Index
R
recovery, software 3–1
Remote ROM Flash 3–7
remote setup 3–2
removal and replacement
CMT 5.25" front drive bezel 6–7
CMT access panel 6–5
CMT battery 6–29
CMT bezel blank 6–8
CMT cable lock 6–4
CMT chassis fan 6–37
CMT diskette drive 6–25
CMT diskette drive bezel 6–8
CMT expansion card 6–13
CMT expansion card guide 6–18
CMT expansion slot cover 6–12, 6–16
CMT front bezel 6–6
CMT front I/O device 6–26
CMT hard drive 6–20
CMT hard drive cable 6–20
CMT heatsink 6–33
CMT hood sensor 6–3
CMT memory 6–10
CMT optical drive 6–22
CMT padlock 6–4
CMT PCI Express card 6–14
CMT PCI retainer latch 6–16
CMT power supply 6–38
CMT power switch assembly 6–27
CMT processor 6–34
CMT Smart Cover Lock 6–2
CMT speaker 6–36
CMT system board 6–28
SFF backwall 7–20
SFF battery 7–48
SFF cable lock 7–5
SFF chassis fan 7–47
SFF computer cover 7–10
SFF expansion card 7–17
SFF expansion card retainer 7–16
SFF external 3.5-inch drive 7–29
SFF fan shroud 7–35
SFF front drive bezel 7–11
SFF front I/O devices 7–36
SFF hard drive 7–31
SFF heatsink 7–38
SFF hood sensor 7–4
SFF memory 7–14
SFF optical drive 7–27
SFF padlock 7–6
SFF PCI Express expansion card 7–19
SFF power supply 7–42
SFF power switch assembly 7–37
SFF processor 7–39
SFF riser card assembly 7–20
SFF Smart Cover Lock 7–2
SFF speaker 7–41
SFF system board 7–44
SFF universal chassis clamp lock 7–6
USDT access panel 8–4
USDT battery 8–25
USDT cable lock 8–3
USDT expansion card 8–14
USDT expansion card retaining latch 8–16
USDT front bezel 8–7
USDT front I/O device 8–20
USDT heatsink assembly 8–21
USDT memory 8–11
USDT padlock 8–3
USDT power supply 8–24
USDT processor 8–22
USDT speaker 8–29
USDT system board 8–30
retired solutions 3–6
riser board
reference designators E–1
SFF removal and replacement 7–20
USDT removal and replacement 8–13
riser card
SFF removal and replacement 7–20
ROM flash 3–7
S
safety precautions, cleaning 5–5
SATA
data cable pinouts 4–2
power cable pinouts 4–2
SATA pin assignments A–8
screws, correct size 5–8
SCSI pin assignments A–4
SDRAM (synchronous dynamic random access
memory) F–1
security
CMT 6–4
DriveLock 3–20
embedded TPM chip 3–24
HP ProtectTools Security Manager 3–24
MultiBay 3–20
password 3–17
Index–6 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Index
SFF 7–5
USDT 8–3
security features
mechanical 3–17
Setup (F10) 3–14
serial interface pin assignments A–3
service considerations 5–7
setup
software 1–2
Windows 1–1
setup password
changing 3–19
deleting 3–19
entering 3–18
setting 3–17
SFF
backwall removal and replacement 7–20
battery removal and replacement 7–48
cable lock removal and replacement 7–5
cable management 7–13
chassis fan removal and replacement 7–47
chassis, illustrated 5–2
computer cover removal and replacement 7–10
disassembly preparation 7–1
drive bezel inserts 7–12
drive positions 7–26
expansion card removal and replacement 7–17
expansion card retainer removal and
replacement 7–16
external 3.5-inch drive removal and replacement
7–29
external security 7–5
FailSafe key 7–2
fan shroud removal and replacement 7–35
front drive bezel removal and replacement 7–11
front I/O devices removal and replacement 7–36
hard drive removal and replacement 7–31
heatsink removal and replacement 7–38
hood sensor removal and replacement 7–4
memory removal and replacement 7–14
optical drive removal and replacement 7–27
padlock removal and replacement 7–6
PCI Express expansion card removal and
replacement 7–19
power supply removal and replacement 7–42
power switch assembly removal and
replacement 7–37
preparation for disassembly 7–1
processor removal and replacement 7–39
riser card assembly removal and replacement
7–20
Smart Cover Lock removal and replacement 7–2
speaker removal and replacement 7–41
system board removal and replacement 7–44
tamper-proof screws 7–2
universal chassis clamp lock removal and
replacement 7–6
Small Form Factor. See SFF
Smart Cover Lock
CMT removal and replacement 6–2
locking 3–23
SFF removal and replacement 7–2
unlocking 3–23
Smart Cover Sensor
protection levels 3–22
setting 3–22
software
Altiris Deployment Solution Agent 3–2
asset tracking 3–14
Boot Block Emergency Recovery Mode 3–7
Computer Setup Utilities 2–1
Dantz Retrospect Express 3–5
Drive Protection System 3–24
Fault Notification and Recovery 3–24
HP Client Management Solutions using Altiris
3–4
HP Client Manger 3–3
HP Insight Diagnostics 2–14
HP Local Recovery 3–2
HP ProtectTools Security Manager 3–24
HP System Software Manager 3–3
image deployment 3–1
Proactive Change Notification 3–6
recovery 3–1
Remote ROM Flash 3–7
Remote System Installation 3–2
setup 1–2
Subscriber’s Choice 3–6
spare part number
tamper resistant wrench 5–7
Torx T-15 screwdriver 5–7
speaker
CMT removal and replacement 6–36
SFF removal and replacement 7–41
USDT removal and replacement 8–29
static electricity 5–3
Subscriber’s Choice 3–6
system board
CMT removal and replacement 6–28
Service Reference Guide, dc7600 390742-002 Index–7
Index
reference designators E–1
SFF removal and replacement 7–44
USDT removal and replacement 8–30
T
tamper-proof screws
CMT 6–2
SFF 7–2
tool 5–7
temperature control 5–5
Torx T-15 screwdriver 5–7
TPM Embedded Security Chip 3–24
Troubleshooting D–1
U
Ultra SCSI pin assignments A–5
Ultra-Slim Desktop chassis 5–2
universal chassis clamp lock 7–6
unlocking Smart Cover Lock 3–23
USB pin assignments A–3
USDT
access panel removal and replacement 8–4
battery removal and replacement 8–25
cable lock removal and replacement 8–3
chassis illustrated 5–2
disassembly preparation 8–1
expansion card removal and replacement 8–14
expansion card retaining latch removal and
replacement 8–16
external security 8–3
front bezel removal and replacement 8–7
front I/O device removal and replacement 8–20
heatsink assembly removal and replacement
8–21
memory removal and replacement 8–11
padlock removal and replacement 8–3
power supply removal and replacement 8–24
preparation for disassembly 8–1
processor removal and replacement 8–22
speaker removal and replacement 8–29
system board removal and replacement 8–30
V
ventilation, proper 5–5
W
Wake-on-LAN feature D–20
Web sites
HP 1–1
HPQFlash 3–7
PC Deployment 3–1
Proactive Change Notification 3–6
Remote ROM Flash 3–7
replicating setup 3–10
replicating setup, BIOS utility 3–10
ROM Flash 3–7
security 3–24
Subscriber’s Choice 3–6
support software 3–13
support software CD subscription 1–1
wrench, tamper-resistant
CMT 6–2
SFF 7–2
Index–8 390742-002 Service Reference Guide, dc7600
Index
